Lexus OM30D01U

User Manual: Lexus 2013 Lexus GS 450h Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 860

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Pictorial index

Search by illustration

For safety
and security

Make sure to read though them

Instrument cluster

How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.

Operation of
each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.

Driving

Operations and advices which are necessary for driving

Interior features

Usage of the interior features, etc.

Maintenance
and care

Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

When trouble
arises

What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

Vehicle
specifications

Vehicle specification, customizable features, etc.

For owners
Index

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Search by symptom
Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS

For your information................................... 8
Reading this manual...................................14
How to search ..............................................15
Pictorial index...............................................16
1

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use
Before driving................................. 28
For safety drive...............................30
Seat belts.......................................... 32
SRS airbags.....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 49
Safety information
for children ................................... 54
Child restraint systems ............... 55
Installing child restraints............. 59
Exhaust gas precautions............ 69
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features............... 70
Hybrid system precautions........ 74
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system .......................79
Alarm...................................................81

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators.............................. 84
Gauges and meters..................... 89
Multi-information display .......... 94
Head-up display.......................... 102
Energy monitor/
consumption screen............... 109

Operation of
each component

3-1. Key information
Keys ....................................................118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system
with push-button start.............. 121
Wireless remote control...........134
Doors................................................137
Trunk................................................... 141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 148
Driving position memory......... 150
Head restraints .............................155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel............................. 158
Inside rear view mirror ..............159
Outside rear view mirrors......... 161

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows.............................164
Moon roof....................................... 167
4

Driving

4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle ......................172
Cargo and luggage.................... 183
Vehicle load limits....................... 186
Trailer towing .................................187
Dinghy towing.............................. 188
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch ............. 189
EV drive mode..............................196
Hybrid transmission................... 199
Turn signal lever..........................205
Parking brake .............................. 207
Brake Hold .................................... 210
Horn ..................................................212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ..........................213
Fog light switch ............................ 218
Windshield wipers
and washer ..................................219
Headlight cleaner switch........ 226

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ......227
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control ............................. 232
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................ 236
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)............251
Intuitive parking assist................ 261
Rear view monitor system....... 274
Driving mode select switch ... 286
Driving assist systems .............. 289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ......... 296
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) .............305
Lexus night view............................ 311
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips .......317
Winter driving tips.......................319

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch .............................328
Remote Touch screen ..............330
Set up screen............................... 336
Voice command system.......... 353
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system......... 364
Rear air conditioning
system...........................................379
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers ..........384
Windshield wiper de-icer.......385

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type.....................386
Using the radio ...........................409
Using the CD/DVD player.... 433
Playing an audio CD
and MP3/WMA discs ......... 435
Playing DVD video .....................441
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information .......... 453
Listening to
Bluetooth® audio ................... 465
Listening to
a USB memory .........................475
Listening to an iPod...................485
Optimal use of
the audio/video system ........ 495
Using the AUX port ..................497
Using the rear seat
audio controls...........................498
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..........................503

5
5-4. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ................506
Using a Bluetooth® phone..... 515
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ................534
Setting the Bluetooth®............558
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ...........................571
• Interior light.............................572
• Personal lights ........................572
5-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features ............. 574
• Glove box ................................576
• Console box ...........................577
• Cup holders ........................... 578
• Auxiliary boxes .....................580
Trunk features............................... 581

5-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
and vanity mirrors...................583
Clock ..............................................584
Ashtrays.........................................585
Power outlets...............................586
Heated steering wheel............588
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators.........................590
Armrest.......................................... 593
Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades.............. 594
Coat hooks....................................597
Assist grips ...................................598
Utility hook ................................... 599
Garage door opener ...............600
Safety Connect........................... 607
6

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..................616
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................. 620
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements... 623
General maintenance...............626
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs....................................630

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................................631
Hood...............................................634
Positioning a floor jack............. 635
Engine compartment ................637
12-volt battery ..............................647
Tires....................................................651
Tire inflation pressure .................661
Wheels ........................................... 664
Air conditioning filter ............... 666
Electronic key battery..............668
Checking and replacing
fuses...............................................670
Headlight aim..............................685
Light bulbs .................................... 687
7

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .................. 702
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.... 703

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................ 704
If you think
something is wrong..................710
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds........ 711
If a warning message
is displayed .................................. 721
If you have a flat tire ................... 749
If the hybrid system
will not start ................................ 762
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ......................764
If the parking brake cannot
be released.................................765
If the electronic key does not
operate properly...................... 767
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged..............................770
If your vehicle overheats.......... 774
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ..............................................778

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .................. 782
Fuel information...........................792
Tire information........................... 795

Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ...............................834
Alphabetical index ................................840

8-2. Customization
Customizable features ............ 807
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize.......................... 818

For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................820
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)............................................... 821
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).............................................823

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the navigation system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Dynamic radar cruise control system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● Vehicle dynamics integrated management
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
• Engine speed
• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with
which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations,
sounds or pictures.
● Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
● Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Reading this manual
CAUTION:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious
injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a
malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

How to search
■

Searching by name
• Alphabetical index ......... P. 840

■

Searching by installation position
• Pictorial index........................ P. 16

■

Searching by symptom or sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............ P. 834

■

Searching by title
• Table of contents ....................P. 2

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

Pictorial index
■ Exterior

The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (P. 687)
1 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137

Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 767
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 728

2 Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141

Opening from inside the cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134
Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 768
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 729

3 Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

4 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 385
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 618

5 Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 784

6 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651

Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 790
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651
Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 749

7 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634

Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634
Engine compartment cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 638
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 785
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 774
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 728

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 687, Watts: P. 791)
8 Headlights/parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
9 Fog lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218
10 Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205
11 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
12 Stop lights

Brake Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 210

13 License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
14 Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 199

15 Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213

*: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

■ Instrument panel

1 Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189

Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189
Emergency stop of the hybrid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 703
When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 762
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 742

2 Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199

Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 704
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 764

3 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 84
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 711

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

4 Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 94

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94
Energy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109
When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 721

5 Parking brake switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 320
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 721

6 Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205

Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . .P. 213
Fog lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 218

7 Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 646
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 739

8 Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 702
9 Trunk opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
10 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634
11 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150

12 Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384

13 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386

Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 386
Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 506

14 Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 142

*: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

■ Switches

1 Headlight cleaner switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
2 VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 291
3 Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
4 Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
5 HUD (Head-up display) switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
6 Heated steering wheel switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 588
7 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 305
8 Lexus night view switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 311
9 Brake hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

1 Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
2 Outside rear view mirror switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
3 Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137
4 Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
5 Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
6 PCS OFF switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 297
7 Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 654
8 AFS OFF switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 215

*: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

1 Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 503
2 Paddle shift switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
1
3 Back switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353
1
4 Talk switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353

5 Telephone switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 507
6 “DISP” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 95
2
7 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239

8 Cruise control switch

Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 232
Dynamic radar cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236

9 Tilt and telescopic steering control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
2
10 LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

2
1 Seat heater switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 590
2
2 Seat ventilator switches* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 591
2
3 Intuitive parking assist switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261
2
4 Rear sunshade switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 594

5 Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 286
6 EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 196
7 Snow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 200

*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

■ Interior

1 SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
2 Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
3 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 148
4 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 155
5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32
6 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
7 Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137
8 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 578
1
9 Auxiliary boxes* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 580

Ashtrays*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 585

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

1 Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 159
2 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583
3 Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583
4 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572
2
5 Personal lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572

6 Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167
1
7 “SOS” button* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 607

8 Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 600

*1: If equipped
*2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Pictorial index

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................28
For safety drive...............................30
Seat belts .......................................... 32
SRS airbags .....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 49
Safety information
for children....................................54
Child restraint systems ...............55
Installing child restraints.............59
Exhaust gas precautions............ 69
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features............... 70
Hybrid system precautions........74
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ...................... 79
Alarm .................................................. 81

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Before driving
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1

Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.

Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure the
floor mats in place.

*: Always align the

marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat

● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in

the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.

● With the hybrid system stopped and the

shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not interfere
with the floor mat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

1-1. For safe use

For safety drive
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.

Correct driving posture
1

Adjust the angle of the seatback
so that you are sitting straight up
and so that you do not have to
lean forward to steer. (P. 148)

Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (P. 148)

Lock the head restraint in place
with the center of the head
restraint closest to the top of your
ears. (P. 155)

Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 32)

Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle. (P. 32)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and
outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 159, 161)
CAUTION

● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

● Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel

tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue
driving and take a break immediately.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so that it

comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with
the neck or slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low as

possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the seat-

back. Sit up straight and well back
in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt
1

To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.

To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Release button

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1

Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.

Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.

Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)
For children or smaller-than-average people, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward so that the
shoulder belt does not sit close to
the person’s neck.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.

1-1. For safe use

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt
to quickly restrain the occupant by
retracting the seat belt when the
vehicle is subjected to certain types
of severe frontal collision.
The front seat pretensioners also activate when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate in
the event of a minor frontal impact, a
minor side impact, a rear impact or a
vehicle rollover.

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision
system)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the precollision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
(P. 296)
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used
to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the
belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 59)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55)

● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-

low the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 32)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

■ Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more

than one person at once, including children.

● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat

belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.

The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.

● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 32)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt completely over
the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with
the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32)
■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners

If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 33)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed

in the door.

● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.

● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in

a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.

■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because

the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by

another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.

NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types
of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants.
They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death
or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

◆ SRS front airbags
1

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger
from impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
3

SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats

SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box
door.

1-1. For safe use

SRS airbag system components

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Front passenger occupant clas- 9 Front side airbags
sification system (ECU and sen- 10 SRS warning light
sors)
11 Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (front
12 Rear side airbags
doors)
13 Side impact sensors (rear)
Knee airbags
14 Driver’s seat position sensor
Front passenger airbag
15 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Curtain shield airbags
16 Airbag sensor assembly
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
17 Front passenger’s seat belt
OFF” indicator lights
buckle switch
Seat belt pretensioners and
18 Front impact sensors
force limiters
Side impact sensors (front)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information.
As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

■ SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or

serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of
inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you
with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the
steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now,
you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

CAUTION

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If the seat belt extender has been con-

nected to the front seat belt buckle but the
seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-

ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the
front passenger seat. (P. 55)

● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean

against the dashboard.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.

● Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-

senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.

● Do not attach anything to or lean anything

against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad, lower portion of the instrument panel and door of the glove box.
These items can become projectiles when
the SRS driver, front passenger and knee
airbags deploy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

● Do not lean against the door, the roof side

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a

door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items

could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy.

● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to

remove it.

● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags

inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag

components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have

deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door

or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad,

door of the glove box and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked,
have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument

● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant

compartment

● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo

bar etc.)

● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as

the seats, the glove box, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

● The windshield may crack.
● For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a

severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push
the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to
dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 607)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars
or roof side rails

1-1. For safe use

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set

threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passen-

ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(P. 49)

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that

exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the
vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal colli-

sion.

■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard

surface

● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But,
whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to
a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment

● Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed
side collision.
● Collision from the front*
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover

*: Depending on the conditions and type of
accident, the curtain shield airbags may
deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield

1-1. For safe use

■ When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.

● A portion of a door is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

● The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-

board near the front passenger airbag,
lower portion of the instrument panel or
door of the glove box is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.

● The surface of the seats with the side airbag

is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or

roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification
system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat
and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

For safety and security

Seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■

Adult*1

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
■

Child*3 or child restraint system*4

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights

“AIR BAG
OFF”*5

SRS warning light

Off

Seat belt reminder light

Flashing*2

Front passenger airbag

Deactivated

Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use
■

Unoccupied

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

■

Off
1

Deactivated

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/
warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side

Devices

“AIR BAG OFF”
On
Deactivated

Activated

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Activated

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Side airbag
on the front passenger seat

“AIR BAG OFF”

1-1. For safe use

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits
in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child
depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique or posture.

*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A
forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 55)

*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 59)

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the

buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the

seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and
reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of a collision.

● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-

back pockets or armrest).

● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on

the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on

the seatback with their legs.

● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This

● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-

minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.

● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the

front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 59)

● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,

the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-

backs.

● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.

1-1. For safe use

Safety information for children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental

contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to

avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power
window accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch

body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
CAUTION
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use
of child restraint systems.

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-

ate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child

restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 59)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Points to remember

1-1. For safe use

Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child:




Rear facing  Infant seat/convertible seat



Forward facing  Convertible
seat

Booster seat

■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use

the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 32)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must

be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even

if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.

● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the

front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of an accident.

● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the

child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ When children are in the vehicle

Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or

store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints

Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)
(P. 34)

Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not
compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system.

1-1. For safe use

Installation with LATCH system
1

Remove the head restraint.

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.



Type A

Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use


Type B

Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.

For safety and security

For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.

Canada only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
■

Rear-facing  Infant seat/convertible seat
1

Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use
4

While pushing the child
restraint system down into the
rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.

■

Forward-facing Convertible seat
1

Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use
3

Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.

While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt to
retract until the child restraint
system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 66)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use
■

Booster seat
1

Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.
1

Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 32)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1

Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.

Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or LATCH
anchors.

Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.

■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can
be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 34)
■ When installing a child restraint system

● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.

● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it

does not interfere with the child restraint
system.

● Only put a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an
accident.

1-1. For safe use

CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from
the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so
may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.

● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to

ensure that it has been securely installed.

● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-

turer.

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or
an accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-1. For safe use

Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if
inhale.
CAUTION

■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open

the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop

the hybrid system.

● Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

● Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where

it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is
operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

■ Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have
the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving
fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.

Gasoline engine

Electric motor (traction motor)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

◆ When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start off,
the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or
when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.

◆ During normal driving

◆ When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine
via the electric motor (traction motor).

◆ When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction
battery).

Vehicle proximity notification system
When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes
in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.

1-2. Hybrid system

■ Regenerative braking

In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery).
● The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or S.
● The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or S.
■ EV indicator

The EV indicator comes on when driving the
vehicle using only the electric motor (traction
motor).

■ Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop

The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions:
● During gasoline engine warm-up
● During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
● When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
● When the heater is switched on
■ Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
● As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery

does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left
parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be
sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or
10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable
to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

● If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged.

Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy
traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the battery.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

P. 771

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

■ After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed

The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move.
For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when
parked.

● Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear

seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.

● Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
● Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the hybrid system starts

or stops.

● Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
● Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is

depressed.

● Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
● Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents on the both sides of the

rear seatback.

■ Vehicle proximity notification system

In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for
surrounding people to hear.
● In very noisy areas
● In the wind or the rain

Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the
front.
■ Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal

Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.
Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating
and are not a malfunction:

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage
system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as parts that become
extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution
labels attached to the vehicle.

Caution label

Service plug

Power control unit

High voltage cables (orange)

Electric motor (traction motor)

Air conditioning compressor

Hybrid battery (traction battery)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents

Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel
pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the
hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.

Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the instructions. (P. 721)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

There are air intake vents on the
both sides of the rear seatback for
the purpose of cooling the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If the
vents become blocked, the hybrid
battery may overheat, leading to a
reduction in hybrid battery output.

1-2. Hybrid system

■ If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is

disconnected

The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Running out of fuel

When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel
the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light
(P. 714) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be
able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning
light go out is about 2.6 gal. [10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■ Electromagnetic waves
● High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic

shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic
waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.

● Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio

parts.

■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)

The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

CAUTION
■ High voltage precautions

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious injury.
● Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or

● The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.

For safety and security

their connectors.

Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.

● Never try to open the service plug access

hole located behind the rear seats. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is
serviced and is subject to high voltage.

■ Road accident cautions

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
● Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and

turn the hybrid system off.

● Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
● If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may

occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.

● If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte

from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric
acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.

● If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never

use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small
amount of water may be dangerous.

● If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with rear wheels raised. If the wheels

connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing,
the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity
leakage leading to a fire. (P. 704)

● Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked

onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as
soon as possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-2. Hybrid system

CAUTION
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery)
● Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. Never resell, hand

over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have
been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Lexus dealer. Do
not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in
death or serious injury:

• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous
to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an
electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle.
If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way,
accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an
explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of
these dangers.
● If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed,

there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their
connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the
hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service
shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock
that can result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery air vents
● Do not put foreign objects near the air vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery)

may overheat and be damaged.

● Clean the air vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from

overheating.

● Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vents as this may cause a

short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).

● Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If

water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light stops flashing
after the power switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a

built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

The indicator light flashes after the
power switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ Certifications for the immobilizer system
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION
■ Certifications for the immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

1-3. Theft deterrent system

Alarm
The alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
● The hood is opened.

Setting the alarm system
Close the doors, trunk and hood,
and lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the system
is set.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
● Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the

hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For safety and security

● A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than

1-3. Theft deterrent system

■ System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door,

the trunk or hood.

● The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced

when the vehicle is locked. (P. 772)

■ Alarm-operated door lock

When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intruders.

NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

2
2.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators ..............................84
Gauges and meters .....................89
Multi-information display .......... 94
Head-up display .......................... 102
Energy monitor/
consumption screen ............... 109

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.

◆ Instrument cluster

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.

◆ Center panel

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s
systems.
*1

Brake system warning light
(P. 711)

(U.S.A.)

*1, 2

“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 713)

(if equipped)

Brake system warning light
(P. 711)

*1, 2

Brake hold operated
indicator (P. 713)

Charging system warning
light (P. 712)

Parking brake indicator
( P. 713)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction
indicator
lamp (P. 712)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator
(P. 713)

(Canada)

Malfunction
indicator
lamp (P. 712)

Brake system warning light
(P. 714)

(Canada)

SRS warning light
(P. 712)

Open door warning light
(P. 714)

ABS warning light
(P. 712)

Low fuel level warning light
(P. 714)

ABS warning light
(P. 712)

Seat belt reminder light
(P. 714)

(U.S.A.)

*1
(Canada)

Electric power steering
system warning light
(P. 712)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Master warning light
(P. 714)

Instrument cluster

(Canada)

2. Instrument cluster

*1, 2

“PCS” warning light
(P. 712, 726)

Tire pressure warning light
(P. 715)

(if equipped)

Slip indicator (P. 713)

*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that
a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on,
or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not
come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 205)

(U.S.A.)

Tail light indicator
(P. 213)

“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 215)

(if equipped)

Headlight high beam indicator (P. 214)

(if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist indicator (P. 261)

Front fog light indicator
(P. 218)
“READY” indicator
(P. 189)

*1, 2

*1, 3

Slip indicator
(P. 291)
VSC OFF indicator
(P. 291)
“PCS” warning light
(P. 297)

(if equipped)

EV indicator (P. 72)
(U.S.A.)

Cruise control indicator
(P. 232, 236)

(if equipped)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator
( P. 207)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 207)

Radar cruise control indicator (P. 236)

Brake hold standby indicator (P. 210)

Cruise control “SET” indicator (P. 232, 236)

Brake hold operated indicator (P. 210)
*1

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

“AIR BAG ON/
OFF”
indicator
(P. 49)

Instrument cluster

(Canada)

Headlight indicator
(P. 213)

(if equipped)

LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) indicator
(P. 251)

2. Instrument cluster

*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster than
usual to indicate that the system is operating.

CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters


When driving mode is in other than sport mode (P. 286)

Instrument cluster



When driving mode is in sport mode (P. 286)

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

90
1

2. Instrument cluster

Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature

Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P. 72)

ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
Changes colors or brightness according to driving mode or way of driving
(P. 93)

Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 94)

Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed

Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 199)

Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.
Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Changing the display
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip
meter.
2

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1

Darker

Brighter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

Instrument panel light control

2. Instrument cluster

■ The meters and display illuminate when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Instrument panel brightness adjustment

The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be
adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.),
turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time,
any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to
both settings at once.
■ Limitation of brightness adjustment

The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the
light sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument
panel brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the
automatic adjustment will not be performed.
■ Hybrid System Indicator
1

Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.

Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.

Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.

Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)

● Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is other than the sport

mode.

● By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be

achieved.

● Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to

charge the battery.

*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

■ ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
● When sport mode is selected, SPORT lamp (red) will illuminate.
● When all of the following conditions are satisfied and Eco-friendly driving, ECO

lamp (blue) will illuminate. (ECO lamp will become brighter the more Eco-friendly
driving you perform. Also, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds
Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp turns off. (P. 92) However, when Eco drive
mode is selected, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of
Eco driving, ECO lamp does not turn off.):
Driving with the shift lever in D
Paddle shift switch is not operated.
Either normal mode or Eco drive mode is selected.
The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or below.

■ Tachometer

Hybrid System Indicator switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport
mode.
■ Engine speed

On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve
fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. on/off operation of ECO lamp) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-

cates the maximum engine speed.

● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the

red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 774)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

•
•
•
•

2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display
Display contents
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of drivingrelated data including the current outside air temperature.
● Energy monitor (P. 110)
● Outside temperature display

(P. 95)
● Trip information (P. 95)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information
● Tire inflation pressure

(if equipped) (P. 661)
● Drive monitor (P. 97)
● Intuitive parking assist display*

(if equipped) (P. 263)
● Dynamic radar cruise control dis-

play* (if equipped) (P. 236)

● LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) dis-

play* (if equipped) (P. 255)

● Warning messages (P. 721)
Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s
systems. Display can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” button. (P. 95)

*: Automatically displayed when the system is used. Display can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
(P. 95)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

Trip information
■

Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.

Energy monitor
P. 110

■

Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40F (-40C) to 122F (50C)

■

Current fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption

■

Average fuel consumption after refueling
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

■

96
■

2. Instrument cluster

Average fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset
• The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP”
button for longer than 1 second when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.

■

Average vehicle speed
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” button for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.

■

Driving range
Displays the estimated approximate distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch
off, the display may not be updated.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster
■

Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)
Displays inflation pressure of each tire
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be displayed

Drive monitor

For display and selection procedures, follow the “Setting up the displays”.
The information displayed on the drive
monitor will not be displayed on the
trip information screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

Outside temperature, average fuel
consumption after refueling or driving range can be selected and displayed.
If displayed on the drive monitor,
other trip information or warning
messages can be displayed simultaneously.

2. Instrument cluster

Setting up the displays
1

While the vehicle is stopped,
press the “DISP” button until the
“Settings” screen appears.

Press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.

Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired setting item by pressing the “DISP”
button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster
4

Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired setting by pressing the “DISP” button.
The display goes back to step

The display goes back to step 1 .
(The display goes back to step 1
automatically in few seconds without
proceeding step 5 .)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the “EXIT” by
pressing the “DISP” button.

100

2. Instrument cluster

■ System check display

After turning the power switch to ON mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while
system operation is checked.
■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a

garage, tunnel, etc.)

■ Setting display automatic cancelation

In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed
through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.
● When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
● When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■ Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch

is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

● “---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavor-

able radio wave conditions.

● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be

different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■ Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■ Customization

Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

101

CAUTION
■ The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death
or injury.
■ Cautions during setting up the display

NOTICE
■ During setting up the display

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating
while setting up the display features.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

102

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display
Summary of functions
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other information onto the windshield.
1

Head-up display
Display brightness will change automatically according to the brightness
of the surrounding area.

“HUD” button

Display brightness adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be adjusted to
the desired level.

Display
switch

position

“DISP” button

adjustment

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

103

Head-up display contents
● Vehicle speed
● Hybrid System Indicator

(P. 106)

● Tachometer
● Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 199)
● Audio display

● Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)

(P. 107)
When approaching an intersection while the navigation system is giving route
guidance, an arrow will automatically be displayed to indicate the direction of
travel.
● Lane departure warning display (LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])

(if equipped)

(P. 736)

● Approach warning display (dynamic radar cruise control)

(if equipped)

(P. 735)

● Pre-collision braking warning message (pre-collision system)

(if equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

(P. 723)

Instrument cluster

Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is
operated

104

2. Instrument cluster

Switching the head-up display
■

“HUD” button
Pressing the switch turns the
head-up display on/off and
changes the vehicle speed display units as follows:


U.S.A.

OFF  ON (MPH) 
ON (km/h)  OFF


Canada

OFF  ON (km/h) 
ON (MPH)  OFF
■

“DISP” button
Pressing the button changes the
display items (except vehicle
speed).
1

Off

Hybrid System Indicator

Tachometer

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

105

Making the display easier to see
■

Adjusting the display position
1

Higher

Lower

Setting the brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accordance
with the brightness of the surrounding environment. However, the
brightness can also be manually adjusted in 9 stages.
1

Brighter

Darker

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

■

106

2. Instrument cluster

Hybrid System Indicator
1

Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.

Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is
not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically
stop and restart under various conditions.

Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven
in an Eco-friendly manner.

Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

107

Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the direction the vehicle should go is guided by the arrow.
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the route guidance will
start and the distance* to the intersection will also be displayed.

*: The distance decreases in increments

Display customization
The audio display can be shown or hidden.
1

Press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.
Customization can be performed
when the head-up display is on and
the vehicle is traveling at less than 5
mph (8 km/h).

Press the “DISP” button to switch
between on and off.
On and off will be switched between
each time the button is pressed.
If the button is left alone without being
operated for a short time, setting will
be finished automatically.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

of 164 ft. (50 m) and the distance indication will disappear when the vehicle
passes through the intersection.

108

2. Instrument cluster

■ Head-up display
● The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-

glasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

● When the head-up display is turned off, it will remain off even if the power switch is

turned to ON mode after the power switch has been turned off.

■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.

CAUTION
■ Before using the head-up display

Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not
interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to components
● Do not place any drinks near the head-up

display projector. If the projector gets wet,
electrical malfunctions may result.

● Do not place anything on or put stickers

onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display
indications.

● Do not touch the inside of the head-up dis-

play projector or thrust sharp edges or the
like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

109

Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information
display and the Remote Touch screen.
Multi-information display

Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch knob

“MENU” button

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

110

2. Instrument cluster

Energy monitor
■

Remote Touch screen



Vehicles without a navigation system
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed, select
“Energy”.



Vehicles with a navigation system
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

Select “Info/Apps” on the
“Menu” screen.

Select “Fuel Consumption” on
the “Information” screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed, select
“Energy”.

The “Energy Monitor” screen can be displayed on the “Side Display”.
For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster
■

111

Multi-information display
Press the “DISP” button on the
steering wheel several times to
select the energy monitor display.

Instrument cluster

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

112

2. Instrument cluster

Remote Touch screen

Multi-information display

When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor
(traction motor)
When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline
engine and the electric
motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine

When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)

When there is no energy
flow
Low
Hybrid battery (traction battery) status

Full

Low

Full

These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster

113

Consumption
Vehicles with a navigation system: The consumption screen can be displayed on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.


Vehicles without a navigation system

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on
the “Menu” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.



Vehicles with a navigation system

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/
Apps” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.

If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

114
■

2. Instrument cluster

Trip information
If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
1

Resetting the consumption
data

Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes

Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.

Displays the average vehicle
speed since the hybrid system
was started.

Displays the elapsed time
since the hybrid system was
started.

Cruising range (P. 115)
Average fuel consumption for the
past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages
attained since the power switch
was last turned to ON mode. Use
the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual conditions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

2. Instrument cluster
■

115

Past record
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
Updating the average fuel
consumption data

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption
record
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated.
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■ Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current
fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Instrument cluster

116

2. Instrument cluster

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

117

Operation of
each component

3
3-1. Key information
Keys ....................................................118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system
with push-button start ..............121
Wireless remote control .......... 134
Doors ................................................137
Trunk...................................................141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 148
Driving position memory......... 150
Head restraints ............................ 155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel .............................158
Inside rear view mirror.............. 159
Outside rear view mirrors......... 161
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows............................ 164
Moon roof.......................................167

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

118

3-1. Key information

Keys
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
1

Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (P. 121)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 134)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key
out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store
it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the
electronic key. If the electronic key
battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you
will need the mechanical key.
(P. 767)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-1. Key information

119

■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 142, 576)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the
plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

120

3-1. Key information

NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to

such materials.

● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,

audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as lowfrequency therapy equipment.

■ Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that
are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function
properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-

related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
■ When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

121

Smart access system with push-button start
Function summary
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should
always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 122)

Opens the trunk (P. 122)

Starts the hybrid system (P. 189)

■ Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Welcome light illumination control

The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night
when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if
the light switch is in the “AUTO” position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

122

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the doors
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passenger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 126)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door
handle) to lock all the doors.

Opening the trunk
Press the button.
If the vehicle is equipped with power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

123

Antenna location and effective range
■

Antenna location
1

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna outside the trunk

Antenna inside the trunk

Operation of each component

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

124
■

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door
handle. (Only the doors detecting
the key can be operated.)

When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release
button.

When starting the hybrid system or changing power switch
modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door

handle

If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the
same time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

125

■ Alarms and warning indicators

An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information display are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take
appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (P. 721)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
Alarm

Situation

Correction procedure

The power switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
Turn the power switch off
Interior alarm sounds door was open (or the
and close the driver’s
continuously
driver’s door was opened
door.
while the power switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

The trunk was closed
while the electronic key Retrieve the electronic
was still inside the trunk key from the trunk and
Exterior alarm sounds and all the doors were close the trunk lid.
locked.
once for 5 seconds
An attempt was made to
Close all of the doors and
lock the vehicle while a
lock the doors again.
door was open.

126

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
1

Turn the power switch off.

When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold
or
for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

,
.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2 .)
Multi-information
display

Unlocking function

Beep

Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
door.
Interior: Pings once
Holding a passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding a door handle unlocks Exterior: Beeps twice
all the doors.
Interior: Pings once
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been
changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after
is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 81)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

127

■ Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take

some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the
electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press

twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart access system with push-button start
cannot be used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

■ Electronic Key battery-Saving Function

128

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 767)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air-

port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic

objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit

radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

129

■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the

system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch
modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the
vehicle.
or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can
be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the

hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.

● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door han-

dle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds
if the doors are not opened and closed.)

● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is

near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked

130

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Note for locking the doors
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock

operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.

● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective

range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 127)
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer
will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
● The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,

etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor
on the lower part of the door handle.

● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be

careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

■ Note for the unlocking function
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors

from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective

range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. (P. 127)
● If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to
unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
● Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be

careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

131

■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of

the vehicle.

● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

(P. 807)

■ Alarm

Using the smart access system with push-button start to lock the doors will set the
alarm system. (P. 81)
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the

electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.

● Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.

The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment),
conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the
surrounding area. (P. 143)

■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.

(P. 767)

● Starting the hybrid system: P. 768

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

132

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system

stops. (P. 746)

● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become

depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 668)

• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control
does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•
•
•
•
•
•

TVs
Personal computers
Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
Table lamps
Glass top ranges

■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 668
■ Customization

Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-

tomized setting

● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 134, 767)

● Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: P. 768
● Stopping the hybrid system: P. 190

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

133

■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14CBA

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

 For vehicles sold in Canada

CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away

from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 123)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and

implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

134

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control
Function summary
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
1

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.

Opens the windows and moon
roof (press and hold)*

Opens the trunk
(press and hold)
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.

Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (P. 135)

*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

135

■ Operation signals

Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Trunk:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■ Welcome light illumination control

P. 121
■ Door lock buzzer

■ Panic mode

When
is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
■ Security feature

P. 121
■ Alarm

Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 81)
■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 128

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.

136

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 767)
■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 132
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 668
■ Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14CBA

FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

137

Doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.

◆ Entry function
P. 121

◆ Wireless remote control
P. 134

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

◆ Inside lock buttons
1

Locks the door

Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

◆ Door lock switches

138

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON
mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
1

Unlock

Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors.
Push down on each rear door switch
to lock both rear doors.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

139

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 807.
Function

Operation
All doors are automatically locked
when vehicle speed is approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

“Auto Lock by Shift from P”

All doors are automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever to position
other than P.

“Auto Unlock by Shift to P”

All doors are automatically unlocked
when shifting the shift lever to P.

“Auto Unlock by Driver Door”

All doors are automatically unlocked
when driver’s door is opened.

■ Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■ Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 767)
■ If a wrong key is used

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

“Auto Lock by Speed”

140

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.

● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

141

Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or
wireless remote control.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the
trunk can be closed using the trunk closer.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Press the opener switch.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
■

Entry function
P. 121

■

Wireless remote control
P. 134

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.

142

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Pressing the switch closes the trunk
lid automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid
is closing opens the trunk lid again.

When closing the trunk
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side
and push the trunk down from the
outside to close it.

Luggage security system
The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage
stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
1

Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even
with the wireless remote control or the
entry function.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

143

■ Trunk light

The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left

inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.

● Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the

key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened.
In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave
conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check
where the key is before closing the trunk.

● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the

doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop
the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

● Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the

144

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

■ Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the
glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside
of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.

■ Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 768)
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

P. 119

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may

open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk
may be thrown out, causing an accident.

● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.

● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.

Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

145

CAUTION
■ Using the trunk

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious
injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening

it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.

● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-

rounding area is safe.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the

trunk is about to open or close.

● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may

move abruptly in strong wind.

It is more difficult to open or close the trunk
lid on an incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before
using the trunk.

● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care

to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.

● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to

press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk
lid, it may result in hands or arms being
caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully.

146

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION
■ Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It takes
several seconds before the trunk easy closer
begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this
may cause bone fractures or other serious
injuries.
■ Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or

anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the

trunk is about to open or close.

● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic

operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
trunk lid may open or close suddenly.

● On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the

trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an

abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk
lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.

• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power
switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic
operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or
the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

147

CAUTION
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid.

● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object

that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions (vehicles with power trunk opener and

closer)

Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power

trunk opener and closer)

● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the

power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the
trunk lid may cause a malfunction.

● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and

closer is operating.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

NOTICE

148

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats
Adjustment procedure


Type A



Type B

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback
switch

Lumbar support adjustment
switch

Pelvic support adjustment
switch (if equipped)

angle

adjustment

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
8 Seat cushion length adjustment
switch (if equipped)
4 Vertical height adjustment switch
5 Seatback upper angle adjust- 9 Seatback side support adjustment switch (if equipped)
ment switch (if equipped)
3

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

149

■ Power easy access system

The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with power switch mode
and the driver’s seat belt condition. The passenger’s seat moves when the passenger’s door is opened. (P. 153)

CAUTION
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are

not injured by the moving seat.

● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■ Seat adjustment

■ When adjusting the seat positions

Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

150

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Driving position memory
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and
recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to
activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the
position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized (if equipped).

Entering a position to memory
1

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to
the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat,
adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.)

While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

151

Recalling the memorized position
1

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the desired position.

Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■ The adjusted positions that can be memorized
 Vehicles without seatback side support adjustment switch

The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support switch can
be memorized.
 Vehicles with seatback side support adjustment switch

All adjusted positions can be memorized.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

■ When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through

152

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
(driver’s side only)
A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the
door.
■

Setting procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift
the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked
properly.
1

Turn the power switch to ON mode and recall the position which you
want to link.

While pressing the button to
recall the position, press the
driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats
■

153

Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock
operation.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.
1

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

Power easy access system

■

Auto away function when exiting the vehicle (driver’s/front passenger’s seat)


Driver’s seat

When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering
wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver
and the seat will move backward:
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The power switch has been turned off.
• The driver seat belt has been unfastened.


Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)

If the lumbar support, side support (if equipped), etc. of the front passenger’s seat has been adjusted, the seat will return to its original state if
the front passenger’s door is opened while the vehicle is stopped to
allow easy exit from the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

The auto away/return function
enables easy access by activating
when the driver or front passenger
attempts to enter or exit the vehicle.

154
■

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Auto return function when entering the vehicle (driver’s seat only)
When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering
wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward:
• The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.

■ When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation

If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized position but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or fastening the driver’s
seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off

Driver’s seat:
Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door
is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Memorized steering
wheel position can be activated by pressing the power switch.
Front passenger’s seat:
Memorized positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened by pressing button “1”, “2” or “3”.
■ Correct seat position

When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is
being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current
position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.
■ The auto away function for exiting the driver’s seat

If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not
operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
■ Customization

The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 807)

CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

155

Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats
Vertical adjustment
1

Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Angle adjustment (if equipped)



The position of the head restraint
can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward
from the foremost position, it will
return to the rearmost position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Side support adjustment
(if equipped)

Operation of each component



Down

156

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Rear seats
1

Up
Pull the head restraints up.

Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button

■ Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.

Lock release button
■ Installing the head restraints
 Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
Lock release button
 Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock
position while pressing the lock release button.
Lock release button

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

157

■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are

locked in position.

● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

■ Head restraint precautions

158

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
1

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode*.

*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
power switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system. (P. 150)
■ Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with power switch mode
and the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 153)

CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

159

Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind,
the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic
function mode
1

OFF

anti-glare

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the power switch is turned
to ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Indicator

Operation of each component

Anti-glare function

160

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ To prevent sensor error

To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Rear view mirror adjustment (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])

To ensure that the LKA operates properly,
make sure that it does not block the LKA
camera sensor.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

161

Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment procedure
1

To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
1

Left

Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.

Right

Down

Left

Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle’s rear.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.

162

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
● When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view

mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order
to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” nor
“R”.

● If the mirror angle adjustment switch is operated while the linked mirror function is

in operation, the angle and position of the mirrors can be remembered, and the
mirrors will operate at the angle adjusted to the last time the linked mirror function
was operated.
However, because the mirrors move based on the angle they are in when the linked
mirror function is not operating, the mirror angle when the linked mirror function is
operating will also be changed if the mirrors are adjusted while the function is not
operating.

■ When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 384)
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 150)
■ Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 159)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

163

CAUTION
■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.

Operation of each component

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

164

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows
Opening and closing procedures
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*: Pushing the switch in the opposite
direction will stop window travel partway.

Window lock switch
Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a
passenger window.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Indicator

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

165

■ The power windows can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.

● After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window

Operation of each component

switch in the one-touch closing position while the power switch is turned to ON
mode.

● If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained

above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

166

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.*

(P. 767)

● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 134)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the power windows open.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a

position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.

■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the window fully closes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

167

Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it
up and down.

Opening and closing
1

Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce wind
noise.

Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof
partway.

Tilting up and down
1

Tilts the moon roof up*

Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof
partway.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.

168

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ The moon roof can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 767)
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 134)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

169

■ When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
1

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it
will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.

● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
1

Stop the vehicle.

*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up posi-

Press and hold the “UP” switch
tion and stops.

Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.

*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.

* : If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
2

operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then
it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Operation of each component

170

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■ Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening the moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while

it is moving.

● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a

position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-

tion.

● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before

the moon roof fully closes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

171

Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.......................172
Cargo and luggage....................183
Vehicle load limits .......................186
Trailer towing................................. 187
Dinghy towing...............................188
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch..............189
EV drive mode ............................. 196
Hybrid transmission ...................199
Turn signal lever ......................... 205
Parking brake...............................207
Brake Hold.....................................210
Horn.................................................. 212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.......................... 213
Fog light switch.............................218
Windshield wipers
and washer.................................. 219
Headlight cleaner switch ........226

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 227
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control .............................232
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................236
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist) ........... 251
Intuitive parking assist ................261
Rear view monitor system .......274
Driving mode select switch ...286
Driving assist systems...............289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System).......... 296
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)..............305
Lexus night view ............................311
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips........317
Winter driving tips ...................... 319

172

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the hybrid system
P. 189

Driving
1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 199)

If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.
(P. 207)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping
1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to
P. (P. 199)

Parking the vehicle
1

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake.
(P. 207)

Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 199)

Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

173

Starting off on a steep uphill
1

Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

■ When starting off on a uphill

The brake hold is available. (P. 210)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows

may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially

slippery.

● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there

■ Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):

•
•
•
•

Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
Avoid sudden acceleration.
Do not drive continuously in low gears.
Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating properly.

174

4-1. Before driving

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding
down operation.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 792)
■ For efficient use
● Shift the shift lever to D when driving.

In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine
power to recharge.

● Drive your vehicle smoothly.

Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.

● Avoid repeated acceleration.

Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting
in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator
pedal slightly released.

● Shift the shift lever to P when parking.

In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery (traction battery). The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is discharged.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

175

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system
operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator

pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered
only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the
pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.

176

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid sys-

tem off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer
and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 703

● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a

steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 199)

● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside

rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not

outside the vehicle.

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do

not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

177

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce

your ability to control the vehicle.

● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid.

● After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that the

brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected.

■ When shifting the shift lever
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or

roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid

system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

● Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shift-

ing the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious
injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

178

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brakes only: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends
that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.

● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the

vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.

● Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

179

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-

cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such
as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded
or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-

● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-

Driving

ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs
or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to
act as a lens, causing a fire.

● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system

and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.

● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the hybrid system is operating or immedi-

ately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

180

4-1. Before driving

CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to
hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a
serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side
of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.

● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles

closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

● The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems

fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

181

NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,

as this may restrain driving torque.

● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at

the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■ When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag■ If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 749)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

182

4-1. Before driving

NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,

differential, etc.

● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where

possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

183

Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400  750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 186)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.

184

4-1. Before driving

Example based on your vehicle
1

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (370 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176
kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

185

CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block
the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly
causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total

load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• In front of the Remote Touch screen
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

186

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.

◆ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

◆ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 661)

CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-1. Before driving

187

Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a
tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

188

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

189

Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key
on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch
modes.

Starting the hybrid system
1

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.

Press the power switch.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the hybrid system is completely
started.
The hybrid system can be started from
any power switch mode.

Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

190

4-2. Driving procedures

Stopping the hybrid system
1

Stop the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Set the parking brake. (P. 207)

Press the power switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multiinformation display is off.

Changing power switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal
released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be used.
The multi-information display will not
be displayed.

ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as
the audio system can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.

ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other
than P when turning off the hybrid system, the power switch will be turned to
ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

191

When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position
other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
1

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alternately on the multi-information display and then press the power switch
once.

Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-information display are off.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

192

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode
(the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the
power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not
operating.
■ Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle

P. 73
■ Electronic key battery depletion

P. 132
■ When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions

It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■ Conditions affecting operation

P. 128
■ Notes for the entry function

P. 129
■ If the hybrid system does not start
● The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 79)

Contact your Lexus dealer.

● Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the

shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position when Starting” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.

■ Steering lock

After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch
again automatically cancels the steering lock.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

193

■ When the steering lock cannot be released

“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
power switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.

■ Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if
the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this
case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering
lock motor will resume functioning.
■ When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display

■ If the “READY” indicator does not come on

If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the power switch with
the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If the hybrid system is malfunctioning

P. 722
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

P. 668
■ Operation of the power switch
● When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is

pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the power switch mode may
not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

● If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power

switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power
switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.

■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-

tomized setting
P. 767

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.

194

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When starting the hybrid system

Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while driving

If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering
lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■ Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency

If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times
or more in succession. (P. 703)
However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency.
Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking
control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

195

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of

time without the hybrid system on.

● If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch

is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off.

● Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If

the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will
not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is
left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch

If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as
the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

196

4-2. Driving procedures

EV drive mode
In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning
and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for
noises and gas emissions.
However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the
vehicle may produce sound.
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on,
“EV MODE” will be displayed on the
multi-information display. Pressing the
switch when in EV drive mode will
return the vehicle to normal driving
(using the gasoline engine and electric
motor [traction motor]).
■ Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on

It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot
be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display.
● The temperature of the hybrid system is high.

The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.

● The temperature of the hybrid system is low.

The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32F (0C) for a long
period of time etc.

● The gasoline engine is warming up.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.

The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P. 110)

● Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
● The windshield defogger is in use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

197

■ Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold

If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine
will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to
switch to EV drive mode.
To prevent gasoline engine warm up in order
to reduce noises, start the hybrid system without starting the gasoline engine, pressing the
power switch with fully depressing the brake
pedal and pressing the EV drive mode switch.

■ Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode

When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the
following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the
EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
● The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.

● Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
● The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.

When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior
notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.
■ Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode

EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to
approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are situations when EV drive mode cannot be used.
(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level
and driving conditions.)
■ Fuel economy

Your Lexus is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV
drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P. 110)

198

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ Caution while driving

When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians,
people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may
not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra
care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

199

Hybrid transmission
Shifting the shift lever

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.

Shift position purpose
Shift position

Objective or function

Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving*1

S mode driving*2 (P. 202)

*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal
driving.

*2:

By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating forces and
engine braking forces.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.

200

4-2. Driving procedures

Selecting the driving mode
■

Sport mode/Eco drive mode
P. 286

■

Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.
Press the switch.
Press the switch again to return to
normal mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

201

Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift
range, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine
braking force to be selected. The shift range can then be selected by
operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.
1

Upshifting

Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to
D5, will be displayed in the meter.
To return to normal D position driving,
the “+” paddle shift switch must be
held down for a period of time.

Shift ranges and their functions
Meter display

Function

D2 - D5

A gear in the range between D1 and the selected shift
range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle
speed and driving conditions

Setting the shift range at D1

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

■

202

4-2. Driving procedures

Selecting shift ranges in the S position
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by
operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in
the shift range of your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the
shift lever or operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.
1

Upshifting

Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is
automatically set to S3, S4 or S5
according to vehicle speed.

■

Shift ranges and their functions
● You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine brak-

ing force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and

engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.
● If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 5, the shift range may automati-

cally range up in accordance with the vehicle’s speed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

203

■ When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position

A shift range will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range
will be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the “+” paddle shift switch is operated when the shift range is in 5
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
● When the shift lever is shifted to other than D
■ Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation

■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

P. 764

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving
in snow mode.

204

4-2. Driving procedures

CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces

Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

NOTICE
■ Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge

If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged
even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever
in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge,
and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

205

Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.
1

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.

Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn

■

If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if
you want to stop them flashing
Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position 2 or 3 .
If you move the lever to either position 1 or 4 , the selected turn signals will flash.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

206

4-2. Driving procedures

■ Turn signals can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.
■ Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable feature P. 807)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

207

Parking brake
A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.

Manual mode
1

Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light will
come on. (P. 208)
Press and hold the parking brake
switch if an emergency occurs and it is
necessary to operate the parking
brake while driving.

Releases the parking brake

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Operate the parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off.

U.S.A. Canada

208

4-2. Driving procedures

Automatic mode
The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever
operation.
Turns automatic mode on/off
● When the shift lever is moved out

of P, the parking brake will be
released.
● When the shift lever is moved into

P, the parking brake will be set.
Operate the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
■ Parking brake operation
● When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released

using the parking brake switch.

● When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake set-

ting and releasing) is not available.

● If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system

may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

■ Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake indicator light
● Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come

on and stay on as described below:

ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake

indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

209

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning message will turn on or flash. (P. 713, 726)
Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.
■ Usage in winter time

P. 320

NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and
make sure that the vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake.
(P. 765)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

210

4-2. Driving procedures

Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in
D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to
stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the system is
holding the brake, the brake hold
operated indicator (yellow) comes on.

■ Brake hold system operating conditions

The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
● The trunk or hood is not closed.
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.

If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled,
the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a
warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system

has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this
case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information
display.

● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the

brake pedal and press the button again.

● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep

incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. The
multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-2. Driving procedures

211

■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes

The parking brake will not be released automatically. Release the parking brake by
operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (P. 207)
■ When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 713, 725)

CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline

When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake
hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery road

The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.

■ When parking the vehicle

The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long
period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake
may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating
the power switch, depress the brake pedal, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

NOTICE

212

4-2. Driving procedures

Horn
To sound the horn, press on or close
to the
mark.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

213

Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights
listed above turn on.

The headlights, daytime
running lights and all the
lights listed above turn on
and off automatically.
(When the power switch is
in ON mode.)
Off

4
(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

The daytime running lights
turn on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

U.S.A. Canada

214

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Turning on the high beam headlights
1

With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

215

AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light
axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the
tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■

Deactivating AFS
Turn on the AFS OFF switch.
The indicator turns on when the
AFS is deactivated.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking lights turn on auto-

matically (at an increased intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers

greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■ Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
■ Automatic light off system

When the light switch is in
: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is
opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light
switch off once and then back to
or
.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20
minutes.
■ Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

217

■ If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

218

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Fog light switch
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions,
such as in rain and fog.
1

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Turns the front fog lights off
2

Turns the front fog lights on

■ Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

219

Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers. The lever will return to
its original position immediately after operation.
1

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Move the lever up 2 levels
2

Move the lever up 1 level

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 1 level
4

(U.S.A.) or

With AUTO mode selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing
in accordance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
AUTO mode indicator will turn on
when AUTO mode is selected.

Driving

AUTO mode on/off switch

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

(Canada)

Move the lever down 2 levels
5

AUTO mode
indicator

220

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Operation

Status
before
operation

Off

Temporary
operation

Low speed
operation

High speed
operation

Low speed
operation

Off

High speed
operation

Off

Low speed
operation

No change

AUTO
mode

Intermittent
operation

Off

Continuously

Temporary
operation*1
No change

Low speed High speed
operation*2 operation*2

*1: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
*2: AUTO mode will be canceled.
When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by
turning the switch ring.
6

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

221

Switching to the intermittent windshield wipers
The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate
regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops.
Press and hold

until the AUTO

mode indicator stops flashing.
If
is pressed and held until the
AUTO mode indicator stops flashing
again, it will return to its previous state.
The wiper can be switched when the
vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off.
■

Operating the intermittent windshield wipers
1

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Move the lever up 1 level

(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 1
level
(U.S.A.) or

(Canada)

Move the lever down 2
levels

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Move the lever up 2 levels

222

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Operation
or

Status
before
operation

Off

Temporary
operation

Intermittent
operation

High speed
operation

Intermittent
operation

Off

Low speed
operation

High speed
operation

Low speed
operation

Off

Intermittent
operation

High speed
operation

Off

Low speed
operation

No change

Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
5

Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

223

■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph
(170 km/h).
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.
● Intermittent wiper interval
● Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper

sweep occurs)

With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be
switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

224

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of

raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
● If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the power switch is in ON mode, the

wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.

● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F

(-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.

■ When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation

AUTO mode cannot be activated even if

is pressed.

■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

225

NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up

Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 322)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
4

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

226

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight cleaner switch
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■ The headlight cleaners can be operated when

The power switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation

When the windshield washer is operated with the power switch in ON mode and the
headlights on, the headlight cleaners will operate once. (P. 219)

NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling

227

Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types

Use premium unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96]
or higher)
4

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

228

4-4. Refueling

CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted

metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to

come close to an open fuel tank.

● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■ When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE
■ Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling

229

Opening the fuel tank cap
1

With the doors unlocked, press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door.
Push until you hear a click and take
your hand away to slightly open the
fuel filler door. Then open the door
fully by hand.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

230

4-4. Refueling

■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened

Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull
the lever to open the fuel filler door if the fuel
filler door cannot be opened pressing the
rearward of the fuel filler door.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-4. Refueling

231

Closing the fuel tank cap
1

After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.

Close the fuel filler door, and
press the center of the rear edge
of the fuel filler door until you
hear a click.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will lock also.

Driving

■ Fuel filler door lock condition

The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the
following conditions:
● When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
● When the automatic door locking system is operated (P. 810)
● When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked

CAUTION
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

232

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control
Summary of functions
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
1

Indicators

Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed
1

Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

233

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
obtained.
1

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until
the lever is released.

234

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed

resumes.

● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first

accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to
set the new speed.

■ Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the

preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■ If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information dis-

play

Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

235

CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● During emergency towing

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

236

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Dynamic radar cruise control
Summary of functions
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
1

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button

Display

Set speed

Indicators

Cruise control switch

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

237

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1

Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

“SET” indicator will be displayed.

238

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
displayed.
1

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds
the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds
the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 243), the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until
the lever is released.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

239

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
1

Long

Medium

Short

Preceding
vehicle mark

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
power switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the
preceding vehicle mark will also be
displayed.

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Medium

Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Short

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

240

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Canceling and resuming the speed control
1

Pulling the lever toward you cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

241

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-tovehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.

Driving

Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle
distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the
system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle
ahead.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

242
3

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed
of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the
driver.

Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to
constant speed cruising.

Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
■

Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
● When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehi-

cle speed
● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
● Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
● At the instant the accelerator is applied

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

243

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain
a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to dirt etc.
1

Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode, push the lever
forward again and hold for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been set,
it is not possible to return to vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode.
If the power switch is turned off and
then turned to ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
Adjusting the speed setting: P. 233
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 233

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Switch to constant speed control
mode.
(Push the lever forward and hold
for approximately one second.)

244

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following
situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
● The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
● The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO

mode or the high speed wiper operation).

● When snow mode is set.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

245

■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control

The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set

vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

● Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■ When the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) will be activated

Using the radar cruise control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, lane
keeping assistance control is activated.
■ Radar sensor and grille cover

Grille cover

Radar sensor

■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to
inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 723)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

246

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

247

CAUTION
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

248

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and

down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

● At entrances to expressways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors

from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
● During emergency towing

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

CAUTION
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 242) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function

correctly

● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-

ing of the sensor

● When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
● When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:

250

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding

area.

● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

251

LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
Summary of functions
While driving on a freeway or motor highway that has lane markers and
no sharp curves, the system recognizes the lanes using a camera located
above the inside rear view mirror as a sensor to assist the driver with staying in the lane. The LKA system has two functions.
Camera sensor

Driving

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

252

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Functions included in the LKA

Lane departure warning function
If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts
the driver using beeping, screen displays and a sensory warning* given
via the steering wheel.

*: A slight steering torque is applied for a short period of time in the direction of
the center of the lane.
2

Lane keeping assist function
• This function will be active when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of the cruise control (P. 236) is set with vehicle speed
above approximately 45 mph (72 km/h) and while the lane departure warning function is active.
• When the lane keeping assist function is active, a slight steering
torque will be applied, to help the driver maintain the vehicle inside
the lane.
The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled if the steering
wheel is not operated, or if you continue driving with your hands lightly touching the steering wheel. (P. 256)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

253

Turning the LKA system on
Press the “LKA” switch to activate
the system.
“LKA” indicator will come on.
Press the switch again to turn the LKA
system off.
The LKA system will revert to off each
time the power switch is turned to ON
mode.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

254

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Operating conditions for each function
■

Lane departure warning function
● When the vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (48 km/h) or

more
● When the lane width is more than approximately 9.1 ft. (2.8 m)
● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of

more than approximately 394 ft. (120 m)
■

Lane keeping assist function
● When the vehicle speed is between approximately 45 and 112 mph

(72 and 180 km/h)
● When the vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode of the radar cruise

control is on, and the set vehicle speed is approximately 45 mph (72
km/h) or more (the function will not operate when the radar cruise
control is in set speed mode)
● When the lane width is between approximately 9.1 and 13.1 ft.

(2.8 and 4.0 m)
● When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of

more than approximately 755 ft. (230 m)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

255

Indication on the multi-information display
When the LKA system is on, the lane line display and steering wheel display are shown.
1

Lane keeping assist function
operation indication
Steering wheel displayed:
Indicates that the function is currently
operating. (If the lane departure warning operates at this time, the steering
wheel flashes orange.)
Steering wheel not displayed:
Indicates that the function is not currently operating. (When the lane
keeping assist function is canceled,
the buzzer will beep twice.)

Dynamic radar cruise control display

Lane departure warning function
indication (when the inside of the
white line is white):
The function has recognized lane
markers. (If the lane departure warning operates at this time, the lines flash
orange.)

Lane departure warning function
indication (when the inside of the
white line is black):
A lane marker is not recognized by
the system, or the LKA system functions are temporarily canceled.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

256

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Temporary cancelation of the LKA system functions

If any of the following occurs, the LKA system functions will be temporarily canceled.
The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.
● The steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to change

lanes.

● When the system detects no-handed driving. (The lane keeping assist function will

be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)

● The turn signal lever is operated.
● The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system functions.

(The buzzer will beep twice when the lane keeping assist function is being canceled.)

● When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving. (The buzzer will beep

twice when the lane keeping assist function is being canceled.)

● The wiper switch is set on high speed mode or is set on AUTO mode with wipers

operating at high speed. (The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)

● If the vehicle crosses a line for approximately half a minute or more. (The lane keep-

ing assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning
function will continue.)

● When the lane departure warning function is activated.

The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds
after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.

■ The lane departure warning

It may be difficult to feel the sensory warning depending on the road conditions.
■ No-handed driving warning

If the steering wheel is not operated for approximately 15 seconds on a straight road
or approximately 5 seconds on a curve, the buzzer will beep twice, indicators on the
multi-information display will flash, and the lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled. If you drive the vehicle with your hands lightly touching the steering wheel, this may also be detected as no-handed driving.
■ After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LKA system functions may not be available and a warning message (P. 735)
will be displayed for a while after driving has started. In such cases, turn the LKA system off and turn it on again after normal temperature returns. When the temperature
in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor (P. 251)
becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

257

■ If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle

The lane keeping assist function will not operate. Also, the lane departure warning
will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not be recognized.
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following conditions, the LKA system functions may not operate, or it may not
be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be
unable to recognize lane lines causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly, or the lane keeping assist function may not operate properly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
● When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing

or before a ticket checkpoint

● When driving on a sharp curve
● When lanes are extremely narrow or extremely wide
● When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or

improper tire inflation pressure

● When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is
● When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to

recognize compared to white markers.)

● When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or

stones

● When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
● When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a

shadow covers the lane markers

● When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete
● When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light
● When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the

entrance to or exit from a tunnel

● When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the

camera lens

● When driving on roads that are branching or merging
● When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing

water, etc.

● When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving

on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement

● When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or

when the headlights are misaligned

● When driving with a strong crosswind

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

extremely short

258

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven
● When driving on rough or unpaved roads
■ When changing the tires

Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.
■ Warning messages for LKA

Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver
of the need for caution while driving. (P. 724, 735)

CAUTION
■ Before using the LKA system

Do not rely solely on the LKA system. The LKA system does not drive the vehicle
automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the
driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving
safely.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.
■ To avoid operating the LKA by mistake

Switch the LKA off using the “LKA” switch when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for LKA

Do not use LKA in any of the following situations.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● When driving with snow tires, tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment
● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is

low.

● When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinter-

preted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)

● When driving on snowy roads
● When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc.
● When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains

of old lane markers are still visible on the road

● When driving on slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● When driving in a lane other than the driving or passing lanes on a freeway or

highway

● When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving

in a temporary lane

● When emergency towing

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

259

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LKA system
● Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension or sun visor, or replace them with non-genuine

parts.

● Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a

grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).

● Do not modify the sun visor or replace it with anything other than a genuine

Lexus product.

● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Camera sensor (P. 251)

Observe the following to ensure that the LKA system functions correctly.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.

Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield.
windshield near the camera sensor.

● Do not install or place anything near the

camera.

● When adjusting the rear view mirror, make sure that it does not block the camera

lens.

● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.
● If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from

the windshield.
When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper
part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● Do not attach a sticker or other items to the

260

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE
● Do not place anything on the dashboard.

The camera sensor may recognize the image reflected on the windshield as lane
markers by mistake.

● Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass
cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer.

● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or

remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.

● Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disas-

semble the camera sensor.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

261

Intuitive parking assist
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, Remote Touch screen and
a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
■

Types of sensors

Front center sensors

Front corner sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

Driving

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

262
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Intuitive parking assist switch
Turns the intuitive parking assist
on/off
When on, the indicator light comes
on to inform the driver that the system is operational.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

263

Display
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multiinformation display and Remote Touch screen depending on the position
and distance to the obstacle.
■

Multi-information display
1

Front corner sensor detection

Front center sensor detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Rear center sensor detection

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

264
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Remote Touch screen


For 8-inch display

When the rear view monitor
system is not displayed
A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 269)

When the rear view monitor
system is displayed (insert display)
A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner of the
Remote Touch screen when an
obstacle is detected.



For 12.3-inch display

A graphic will be shown on the
side display
A graphic is automatically displayed when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 269)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
■

Front center sensor
Remote Touch screen

Approximate
distance to obstacle

Multiinformation
display

8-inch
display

(continuous)

8-inch
display
(insert
display)

12.3-inch
display

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to
1.6 ft. (50 cm)
(blinking
slowly)

(continuous)
4

Driving

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
(continuous)

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

(blinking
rapidly)

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

266
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Corner sensors
Remote Touch screen

Approximate
distance to obstacle

Multiinformation
display

8-inch
display

8-inch
display
(insert
display)

12.3-inch
display

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

(blinking
rapidly)

(continuous)

(blinking)

(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)

Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■

267

Rear center sensor

Approximate distance Multi-information
to obstacle
display

Remote Touch screen
8-inch display
(insert display)

12.3-inch display

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous)

(blinking slowly)

(continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)

(blinking)

(continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous)

(blinking rapidly)

(continuous)

Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

(continuous)

Driving

(continuous)

268
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
● The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the buzzer sounds continuously:
• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
● When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer
system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within
the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast
beeps.

Detection range of the sensors
1

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

269

Setting up intuitive parking assist
You can change the warning beep volume and Remote Touch screen
operating conditions.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (P. 328)

Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen.

Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Lexus Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
1

Alert volume setting

Display on/off

Alert distance setting

Make sure to save after changing
settings.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

270
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Alert volume setting
The alert volume can be adjusted.

■

Select “1” to “5” on the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings”.

Select “Save”.

Display on/off setting
On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.
1

Select “Display Off”.
When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of intuitive parking
assist will be off. Select “Display Off” again to turn the display of intuitive parking assist on.

2
■

Select “Save”.

Alert distance setting
Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.
1

Select “Front” or “Rear”.
Long distance or short distance can be selected.

Select “Save”.

■ The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
● Front center sensors:

• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Front corner sensors:
• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
● Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

271

■ Intuitive parking assist display

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has
been set to off.
■ Sensor detection information
● The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front cor-

ner and rear bumpers.

● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability

of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may
occur are listed below.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.

272

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular

attention to the following obstacles:
•
•
•
•
•

Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
Sharply-angled objects
Low obstacles
Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision
when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow
noise of air conditioning system.
■ If a message is displayed on the multi-information display

P. 723, 734
■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

273

CAUTION
■ When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for-

ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides
of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.

● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

■ When using intuitive parking assist-sensor

● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no

obstacles are detected.

● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong

impact.

● If the bumper collides with something.
● If the display shows continuously without a beep.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that
the sensor is malfunctioning.

■ Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor
malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

274

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image
of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up,
for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and
may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
Rear view monitor system will activate when the shift lever is in R.
If you move the lever out of R, the rear
view monitor system will be deactivated.
When the shift lever is shifted to the R
position and any mode button (such as
“MENU”) is pressed, the rear view
monitor system is canceled, and the
screen is switched to the mode of the
button that was pressed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

275

Using the rear view monitor system
■

Screen description
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is
shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.

Vehicle width extension guide line

Vehicle center guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line
The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the
edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m)
(blue) from the edge of the bumper.

Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
If an obstacle is detected while the Intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a display is shown in the top right corner of the screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

276

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Rear view monitor system precautions
■

Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system displays an image of the view from
the bumper of the rear area of the
vehicle.
To adjust the image on the rear
view monitor system screen.
(P. 332)
• The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be displayed.
• The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears
on the screen differs from the
actual distance.
• Items which are located higher
than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Corners of bumper

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■

277

Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located above
the license plate.

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If
water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
■

Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width extension guide lines
may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space,
even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width extension guide lines and the
left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In
any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the
fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the
road.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● Using the camera

278

4-5. Using the driving support systems

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Because
of this, objects will appear to be
farther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual distance/course on the road.

● When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

279

● When any part of the vehicle sags

When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error
between the fixation guide lines
on the screen and the actual distance/course on the road.
■

A margin of error

When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of
three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide
lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point 2 .
However, in reality if you back up
to point 1 , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that 1
is closest and 3 is furthest away.
However, in reality, the distance
to 1 and 3 is the same, and 2
is farther than 1 and 3 .

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● Distance guidelines

280
■

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Vehicle width extension guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the
case shown below, the truck appears
to be outside of the vehicle width
extension guide lines and the vehicle
does not look as if it hits the truck.
However, the rear body of the truck
may actually cross over the vehicle
width extension guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the vehicle
width extension guide lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

281

Things you should know
■

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and
the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Symptom

Likely cause

The image is blurry

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

If this happens due to
these causes, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually
checking the vehicle’s
surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once conditions
have
been
improved.)
To adjust the image on
the rear view monitor system screen. (P. 332)

Rinse the camera lens
Dirt or foreign matter
with water and wipe it
(such as water droplets,
clean with a soft cloth.
snow, mud etc.) is adherWash with a mild soap if
ing to the camera.
the dirt is stubborn.

Driving

• The vehicle is in a dark
area
• The
temperature
around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside temperature is low
• There are water droplets on the camera
• It is raining or humid
The image is difficult to • Foreign matter (mud
see
etc.) is adhering to the
camera
• There are scratches on
the camera
• Sunlight or headlights
are shining directly into
the camera
• The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium
lights, mercury lights
etc.

Solution

282

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The camera or surround- Have
the
vehicle
The image is out of aligning area has received a inspected by your Lexus
ment
strong impact.
dealer.
The fixation guide lines
Have
the
vehicle
The camera position is
are very far out of aligninspected by your Lexus
out of alignment.
ment
dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

283

CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system

When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle
before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death
or serious injuries.
● The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the

driver when backing up. Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely
when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

● Never back up while looking only at the screen.

The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could
collide with another vehicle or obstacles if backing up looking only at the screen,
possibly causing an accident. When backing up, be sure to check in front of and
behind the vehicle, both directly and with mirrors.

● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.

When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.

● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your

vehicle before maneuvering into it.

● Do not use system in the following cases:

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire
• When the trunk lid is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The
image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to
see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with mirror all
around the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on

the screen may change.

● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians

that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual distances. (P. 277)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● The instructions given are only guidelines.

284

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system screen
● The position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change in

accordance with the number of passengers, the amount of cargo etc. Be sure to
check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before
proceeding.

● The vehicle width extension guide lines are wider than the actual width of the

vehicle. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
direct visually and with mirror before proceeding.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

285

NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases, or

if the precautions described below are not followed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera
may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury
light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If
this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

286

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to
Eco drive mode or sport mode.

Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips
that involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
left, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
3

287

Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the hybrid system. Suitable for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driving on mountain roads.
When not in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to
the right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on in the multi-information display,
and the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 89)
Also, on vehicles equipped with a
12.3-inch display, the driving mode
is also automatically displayed on
the “Side Display”. (P. 330)
4

Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the
hybrid system. Suitable for sporty driving.
When in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on in the multi-information display, and
the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 89)
Also, on vehicles equipped with a
12.3-inch display, the driving mode
is also automatically displayed on
the “Side Display”. (P. 330)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• SPORT S+ mode

288

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air
conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (P. 364). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating operation and fan speed of the air conditioning
system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco
drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater will be automatically operated to
assist heating performance.
■ Sport mode automatic deactivation

Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving
in sport mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

289

Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not
be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

◆ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces

◆ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

◆ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to
turn the steering wheel

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

290

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆ AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers
for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions,
this system helps riding comfort with superior steering stability, and
helps good vehicle posture (P. 286)

◆ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC and
EPS
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, hybrid system output, steering assist,
and steering ratio

◆ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 296

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

291

When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.

Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
Turning off the TRAC system only
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the button.
The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on
the multi-information display. Press
the button again to turn the system
back on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

■

292

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■

Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems
To turn the TRAC/VSC systems
off, press and hold the button for
3 seconds and more while the
vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “TRAC OFF” will
be shown on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to turn the
systems back on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

293

■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that

TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is

depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in
any of these systems.

● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.

None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■ EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
Even after the TRAC/VSC systems have been turned off, turning the hybrid system
off and then on again will automatically reactivate the TRAC/VSC systems.
■ Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed

When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the
systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.* Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The effectiveness
will improve after a short while.

*: If the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system cannot operate in this case, a warning
message will be shown on the multi-information display.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

■ Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems

294

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on

a snow covered road).

● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-

tions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

295

CAUTION
■ Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

296

4-5. Using the driving support systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System)
When the radar sensor detects that a frontal collision is highly likely or
even unavoidable, safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are
automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by operating the switch. (P. 297)

◆ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the
pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or
loses control of the vehicle. (P. 34)

◆ Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.

◆ Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns
the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automatically applied to reduce the collision speed.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

297

◆ Suspension control
When the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the operation of AVS (P. 290) optimally controls the damping force of the
shock absorber.

◆ Driver monitor system (if equipped)
When the system determines that there is a possibility of a collision, and
either the driver is not facing forward or the driver’s eyes are closed,
PCS warnings are given in advance to warn the driver. If the system
determines that the conditions to operate pre-collision alert braking
have been met even when the possibility of a collision increases further,
pre-collision alert braking will operate.

Disabling pre-collision system
Enabled

Disabled
The “PCS” warning light comes on
when pre-collision system is disabled.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

298

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehicles or
other obstacles on or near the road
ahead and determines whether a
collision is imminent based on the
position, speed, and heading of the
obstacles.

Driver monitor sensor (if equipped)
The driver monitor sensor detects
the direction the driver is facing and
whether the driver’s eyes are open
or closed.
The system determines whether the
driver is facing forward and whether
or not the driver’s eyes are closed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

299

■ The pre-collision system is operational when

The pre-collision system off button is not pressed and the following conditions are
met:
● Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions A):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions B):

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
● Suspension control:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
● Pre-collision alert braking:
• The system determines that the driver is not facing forward, or that the driver’s
eyes are closed.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the vehicle running ahead of
you is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The steering is not being turned.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
● Pre-collision brake assist:

300

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of a collision
● When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
● When driving over a narrow iron bridge
● When there is a metal object on the road surface
● When driving on an uneven road surface
● When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
● When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
● When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears

to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel

● When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic structure

to appear directly in the vehicle’s line of travel

When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
■ Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be
occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■ Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly

The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
● On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
● If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
● If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● When your vehicle is skidding such as the VSC system off
● When your vehicle is steeply inclined

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

301

■ Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system

When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically
disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■ When there is a malfunction in the system

“PCS” warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed.
(P. 713, 723)
■ Certification
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

302

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
● Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding

area.

● Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
● Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
■ Determining the direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are

open or closed

The direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are open or closed
may not be determined correctly if the following conditions exist:
● There is an object between the driver monitor sensor and the driver’s face, such

as when the sensor is blocked.

● A part of the driver’s face is covered.
● The sensor or the driver’s face is exposed to intense light such as sunlight.
● The driving posture is improper.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

303

CAUTION
■ Handling the driver monitor sensor

Observe the following to ensure the driver monitor sensor can function effectively.
Failure to do so may result in a malfunction or may prevent the system from correctly determining the direction the driver is facing, resulting in an unexpected
accident.
● Do not disassemble, damage, lift or pull on the sensor.
● Do not select the sensor while driving.
● Do not wet or spill water on the sensor.
● Do not drop anything on or allow anything to hit against the sensor. Do not sub-

ject the sensor to an impact.

● Make sure that there are no scratches, dirt or stickers on the side of the sensor

that faces the driver.

● Do not place any objects in front of the side of the sensor that faces the driver or

cover the sensor.

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

304

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system

By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT.
There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep
in mind the following important points.
● Assisting the driver in watching the road

The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

● Assisting the driver in making correct judgment

When attempting to estimate the likelihood of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situation.

● Assisting the driver in taking action

The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.

NOTICE
■ Precautions for cleaning the driver monitor sensor
● Gently wipe the sensor with a soft cloth to prevent damage.
● Wipe any excess dirt with a cloth dampened with neutral detergent, all liquids

having been wringed out of the cloth. After that, wipe again with a dry cloth.

● Do not use benzene, thinner, glass cleaners, wax, etc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

305

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver to confirm
safety when changing lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an
adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view
mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicle’s existence
via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

Driving

BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates.

Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a vehicle is in
the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

306

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
1

Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of
the vehicle is not in the detection area

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from
the rear bumper

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

307

■ The Blind Spot Monitor system is operational when

The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
■ The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor system is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

308

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor system may not function correctly
● The Blind Spot Monitor system may not detect vehicles correctly in the following

conditions:
•
•
•
•

During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection
area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the
road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away
from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object
may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall
etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle enters the detection area
■ The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to
see.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

309

■ When there is a malfunction in the system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning messages will be displayed: (P. 727)
● There is a malfunction with the sensors
● The sensors have become dirty
● The outside temperature is extremely high or low
● The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■ Certification for the BSM
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYBSDTX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following three conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

IC: 4135A-BSDTX
This device complies with the radio standards specification RSS-220 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
During printing time of this user manual the approvals listed below are granted. Further countries may become available or actual certification identifiers may be subject to change or update.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

(3) This device may only work when the vehicle is in operation pursuant to § 15.252
(a) (4).

310

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor
system. The system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to
conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual
confirmation of safety is necessary.
■ Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot
Monitor system can function correctly.
● Keep the sensor and its surrounding area

on the bumper clean at all times.

● Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the

bumper.

● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
● Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

311

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus night view
Lexus night view is a system which assists with nighttime driving.
Near-infrared rays are irradiated forward and an image converted
from the irradiated light is shown on the Remote Touch screen. The
image shows pedestrians, obstacles, and road conditions ahead of the
vehicle, which are difficult to see at nighttime with the naked eye.

Displaying the Lexus night view
1

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Turn the headlights on.

Press the Lexus night view switch.

Driving

The Lexus night view is displayed on
the Remote Touch screen.
To return the screen to its previous
state, press the switch again.
When the light sensor (P. 216)
determines that it is currently night
time from the brightness of the surrounding area, the Lexus night view
can be operated by pressing the
Lexus night view switch while the
headlights are on.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

312

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The Lexus night view display
■

When displaying on the “Main Display” (P. 330)

Lexus night view screen

“Side Display” switching button
If this button is selected using the Remote Touch when the Lexus night view is
being shown on the “Main Display”, the “Side Display” will change to a map display. (P. 328)
If the button is selected again, the screen will return to its previous display.

Brightness adjustment button
The brightness of the display can be
adjusted by selecting this button using
Remote Touch.
Make sure to select the “OK” after
adjusting the brightness.
“-”: Darker
“+”: Brighter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems
■

313

When displaying on the “Side Display”
When another screen is displayed on
the “Main Display” while the Lexus
night view is being shown on the
“Main Display”, the Lexus night view
screen will be displayed on the “Side
Display”.
1

Lexus night view screen

“Main Display” switching button
Switches the Lexus night view from
the “Side Display” to the “Main Display”.

■

Imaging range

■ If the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) when the Lexus

night view is operating

An image will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen, but both the range and
the distance of the projection will be limited as near-infrared rays are not being radiated outward.
■ When the Lexus night view switch is pressed while the Lexus night view cannot be

operated

Advice information will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen. Follow the displayed advice.
■ If the Lexus night view switch is pressed at a time when the Lexus night view opera-

tion is not possible

Follow the advice displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
■ When the shift lever is shifted to R while the Lexus night view is operating

The Lexus night view screen switches as follows.
“Main Display”: Switches to the rear view monitor system screen.
“Side Display”: The display blacks out and no image is displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The image is shown ranging from the tip of the low beam to the high beam.

314

4-5. Using the driving support systems

CAUTION
■ Before using the Lexus night view

Never depend on this system only.
Lexus night view is intended as a supplemental aid to help you see pedestrians and
road conditions ahead of the vehicle. As there are limits to the system, do not rely
solely on the system while in use, and drive safely while observing the following
precautions.
■ When using the Lexus night view

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Never drive while looking at the Lexus night view screen only.
● Do not look continuously at the Lexus night view screen while driving. Pedestri-

ans, objects etc. ahead of the vehicle may be overlooked by the system. The system should always be used as a supplemental aid only.

● Lexus night view is designed to help you see objects better when driving in dark-

ness on a road with few curves. Do not use the Lexus night view in well-lit areas or
on roads with many curves or slopes. There may be areas that cannot be displayed by the system due to the road conditions (curve size, gradient, etc.)

● Lexus night view may be unable to project some features at an appropriate level

of brightness. Some or all parts of certain features may be dark or difficult to see.
Do not rely solely on the Lexus night view, and drive carefully while checking the
surroundings for safety, as you would with a normal vehicle. Also, the following
features and conditions may not be displayed clearly.
Features that are difficult to display:
• Clothing of a pedestrian made of a certain kind of material (ex. leather jackets)
• The characters on signs and billboards
• The information on road signs
Conditions in which display is difficult:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Unfavorable weather conditions such as rain, fog, snowfall, snow storms etc.
There are large puddles of water on the road surface following rainfall
The area of the front windshield in front of the camera is fogged up, dirty or icy
The areas around the headlights are covered with ice, snow, mud etc.
The 12-volt battery voltage is remarkably low
There are bright lights ahead of the vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

315

NOTICE
■ The near-infrared camera

Follow these precautions to avoid damage to
or incorrect operation of the Lexus night
view.

● Make sure the front windshield is kept clean.
● System performance may deteriorate if rain water, condensation or ice adheres

to the camera. If you notice the inner lens of the camera is dirty, the garnish will
have to be replaced. Consult your Lexus dealer.

● Do not subject the camera to strong impacts, or disassemble the camera.
● As the alignment of the camera has been very finely adjusted, do not change or

remove the mounting.

● Do not dirty or scratch the camera lens.
● Night view may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● If the front windshield fogs up, defog the windshield using the front defroster.

316

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE
■ The near-infrared light

Follow these precautions to avoid damage to
or incorrect operation of the Lexus night
view system

 Vehicles with discharge head-

lights

● System performance may deteriorate if the

areas around the headlights are dirty. Clean
the vehicle if it is dirty.

● The near-infrared light irradiates strong

energy not visible to the eyes. Do not stare
at the light at close range for a long time.
 Vehicles with LED headlights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

317

Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following
points:
■

Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it
is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning
system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel economy. (P. 286)

■

Use of Hybrid System Indicator

■

When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.

■

Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before
leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a
delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so
can help control excessive gasoline consumption.

■

Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy
can be retained when slowing down.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid
System Indicator within Eco area. (P. 92)

318
■

4-6. Driving tips

Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing
so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel
consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out
until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will
consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding
overuse of the heater.

■

Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate
for the season.

■

Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause
poor fuel consumption.

■

Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when
cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which
can lead to poor fuel consumption.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

319

Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the
size of the tires.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

chains for the rear tires.

320

4-6. Driving tips

Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.

Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the
water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove

any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumu-

lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting

in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or
creeping.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

321

Selecting tire chains
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
1

Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)

Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)

Regulations on the use of tire chains

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

322

4-6. Driving tips

Shifting the windshield wiper position
If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually.
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
■

To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)

■

To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook section.

■ Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving

1/4  1/2 mile (0.5  1.0 km).

● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

323

CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires

being used.

● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.
■ Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, as well as sudden braking and shift-

ing operation to engine braking.

● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is

maintained.

● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Driving

● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,

324

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
■ When standing the windshield wipers up

Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 322)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

4-6. Driving tips

325

Driving

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

326

Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch..............................328
Remote Touch screen.............. 330
Set up screen ...............................336
Voice command system ..........353
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system.........364
Rear air conditioning
system .......................................... 379
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers.......... 384
Windshield wiper de-icer ...... 385

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5
5-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type .....................386
Using the radio............................409
Using the CD/DVD player....433
Playing an audio CD
and MP3/WMA discs .........435
Playing DVD video......................441
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information........... 453
Listening to
Bluetooth® audio ...................465
Listening to
a USB memory ........................ 475
Listening to an iPod...................485
Optimal use of
the audio/video system......... 495
Using the AUX port ..................497
Using the rear seat
audio controls...........................498
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..........................503

327

Interior features
5-4. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................ 506
Using a Bluetooth® phone .....515
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................ 534
Setting the Bluetooth® ........... 558
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 571
• Interior light ............................ 572
• Personal lights........................ 572
5-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features..............574
• Glove box.................................576
• Console box........................... 577
• Cup holders............................578
• Auxiliary boxes.....................580
Trunk features ...............................581

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5
5-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
and vanity mirrors ...................583
Clock...............................................584
Ashtrays ........................................ 585
Power outlets ...............................586
Heated steering wheel ........... 588
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators .........................590
Armrest..........................................593
Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades..............594
Coat hooks................................... 597
Assist grips....................................598
Utility hook....................................599
Garage door opener............... 600
Safety Connect........................... 607

328

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
The illustration below is for vehicles without navigation system.

“•” button
Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.

“COMPASS” button
Press this button to display the compass mode screen.

Remote Touch knob
Use this knob to move the cursor and select items on the screen.
Feedback force, pointer sound volume, on or off of selection sounds etc. can be
changed.

“MENU” button
Press to display the “Menu” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

329

CAUTION
■ When using the Remote Touch
● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as

this may cause an injury.

● Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may

become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Remote Touch
● Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or

lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop
functioning.

● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the

knob may bend or break off.

● Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the

Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.

● Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.

turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

● If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the power switch is

330

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch screen
By using the Remote Touch, you can control the audio system and air
conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc.
Vehicles with a navigation system: Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. The 8-inch display area on the
left of the screen is called the “Main Display”, and the area to the right is
called the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.

“Menu” screen


Vehicles without navigation
system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)



Vehicles with a navigation
system

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Switch

331

Page

“Destination”

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Info/Apps” or “Info”

P. 109/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Setup”

P. 336

“Radio”

P. 386, 409

“Media”

P. 386, 435

“Climate”

P. 364

“Phone”

P. 506

“Display”

P. 332

Initial screen

Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual preferences. (P. 341)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

If the power switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the
initial screen will be displayed for a
few seconds as the system starts up.

332

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Adjusting the display
The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image the camera displays can be adjusted. (For information regarding audio/video
screen adjustment: P. 447)



Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Display”
on the “Menu” screen.

Select “Map•Menu” /“Menu” or “Camera” to display the desired
screen.

Display screen (“Map•Menu”/
“Menu”)



Display screen (“Camera”)

If the map menu adjust screen does If the camera adjust screen does
not appear, select “Map•Menu”/ not appear, select “Camera”.
“Menu”.

Select “<” or “>” to select the desired function (“Contrast” or “Brightness”) and then select the desired screen button to adjust contrast
and brightness.
“-”

“+”

“Contrast”

Weaker

Stronger

“Brightness”

Darker

Brighter

After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

333

■ When using the Remote Touch screen
● If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operat-

ing slightly slower than normal.

● When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may

appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturbing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
■ Changing between day mode and night mode

To display the screen in day mode, even with
the headlight switch on, select “Day Mode”
for brightness and contrast control.
If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition is
memorized even with the hybrid system
turned off.
The display condition is not changed to night mode even if the headlight switch is
turned on when the vehicle is in a bright area such as daytime.
■ To turn off the display

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the Remote Touch screen

Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to
clean the screen, as they may damage the Remote Touch screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The display goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the “Display” screen back
on, select any button. The selected screen appears.

334

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Inputting letters and numbers/list screen operation
Letters and numbers can be input via the screen.
■

To input letters and numbers/symbols
Select the keys directly to enter letters, numbers or symbols.



Letters and numbers



Symbols

: Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing
characters.
“A-Z”: To change letters and numbers
“Other”: To display symbols
: To enter in lower case
: To enter in upper case

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen
■

335

Layout type
Keyboard layout can be changed. (P. 341)



“ABC” type

■

List screen operation



“QWERTY” type

When a list is displayed, use the
appropriate screen button to
scroll through the list.

This indicates the displayed
screen’s position.
:If appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name
is too long for the display.
Select to scroll to the end of
the name. Select to move to
the beginning of the name.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

: Select to skip to the next or
previous page. Select and hold
or
to scroll through the
displayed list.

336

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Set up screen
You can change the Remote Touch screen to your desired settings.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup” on
the “Menu” screen.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.


Vehicles without navigation
system



Vehicles with a navigation
system

Switch

Page

“General”

P. 337/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Voice”

P. 349/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Navigation”

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Vehicle”

P. 350/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual

“Phone”

P. 351

“Bluetooth*”

P. 351

“Audio”

P. 352

“Other”

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

337

General settings
This screen is used for language selection and the on/off settings of operation sounds and automatic screen change, etc.
Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
System time settings

Selecting a language

Unit of measurement*1

Selecting a button color

Selecting keyboard layout

Changing the startup image

Changing the screen off image

Auto screen change*1

Selection sound on/off

Pointer sound on/off

Error sound on/off

Pointer sound volume settings

Setting a feedback force

Delete personal data

Software update*2

Gracenote database update*2

Select “Save” after changing settings.

*1: Vehicles with a navigation system.
*2: For details, contact your Lexus
dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

338
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

System time settings
Used for changing time zones and the on/off settings of daylight saving
time.
1

Select “System Time” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the items to be set.

Time zone

Daylight saving time

Select “Save”.

● Time zone

A time zone can be selected and GMT can be set.
1

Select “Time Zone”.

Select the desired time zone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

339

If “Other” is selected, the zone
can be adjusted manually. Select
“+” or “-” to adjust the time zone
and then select “OK”.

● Daylight saving time

To select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time.
■

Selecting a language
The language can be changed.
1

Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired screen button.

Select “Yes”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

Select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

340
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Unit of measurement (vehicles with a navigation system)
Distance unit can be changed.
This function is available only in English or Spanish. To change language, see “Selecting a language”. (P. 339)
1

Select “Unit of Measurement” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “km” or “mile”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

3
■

Select “Save”.

Selecting a button color
The color of the screen buttons can be changed.
1

Select “Button Color” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired screen button color.
The previous screen will be displayed.

Select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen
■

341

Selecting a keyboard layout
Keyboard layout can be changed.
1

Select “Keyboard Layout” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “ABC” or “QWERTY”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

3
■

Select “Save”.

Changing the startup image (vehicles without a navigation system)
An image can be copied from a USB memory and used as the startup
image.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the
startup image is saved to “StartupImage”. If these folder names are not
used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder names are
case sensitive.)

342

5-1. Remote Touch screen

● Transferring data
1

Open the console box.

Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.

Close the console box.

Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer”.

Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

343

● Setting the startup image
1

Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select the desired image.

Select “Save”.

● Deleting transferred image
1

Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete All”.
5

Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

344
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Changing the screen off image
Select “Screen Off” on the “Display” screen to turn off the screen. An
image can be copied from a USB memory and can be set to display
when “Screen Off” is selected.
When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the
screen off image is saved to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names
are not used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder
names are case sensitive.)

● Transferring data
1

Open the console box.

Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.

Close the console box.

Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen
5

Select “Transfer”.

Select “Yes”.

345

● Setting the screen off image
1

Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.

Select the desired image.

Select “Save”.

● Deleting transferred images
1

Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.

Select “Delete All”.

Select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

346
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Pointer sound volume settings
The pointer sound volume can be adjusted.

■

Select “Pointer Sound Volume” on the “General settings” screen.

Select the desired button.

Select “OK”, and then “Save”.

Setting a feedback force
When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically
pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted.
1

Select “Feedback Force” on the “General settings” screen.

Select “+” or “-”.

Select “OK”, and then “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen
■

347

Delete personal data
This function is not available while driving.
1

Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.

Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.

Select “Yes”.

*: Vehicles with a navigation system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The following personal data can be deleted or returned to their default settings:
• Maintenance conditions*
• Maintenance information off setting*
• Address book*
• Areas to avoid*
• Previous points*
• Route guidance*
• Route trace*
• Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Phone sound settings
• Phone display settings
• Message settings
• Audio setting
• Bluetooth® audio setting
• Startup image data
• Screen off image data

348

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ About startup or screen off images
● The images file extension is JPG or JPEG.
● The images file name, including the file extension, can be up to 32 characters.
● Image files of 10 MB or less can be saved.
● Up to 3 images can be downloaded.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

349

Voice settings
Voice guidance can be set.
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
1

Select voice guidance volume

Voice guidance on/off during
route guidance*

Voice guidance on/off during
audio system is in use

Voice recognition prompt on/off
This setting can also be changed on
the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
(P. 361)

Restore default settings

Voice commands on/off when
using the audio/video and air
conditioning system

Voice guidance on/off when
using the traffic information*

Voice guidance on/off when
using the XM NavWeather™*

Make sure to save after changing
settings.

*: Vehicles with a navigation system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

350
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Voice volume
The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off.
1

Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.

Select the desired level.
Vehicles with a navigation system:
If voice guidance is not needed,
select “Off” to disable the feature.

Select “Save”.

Vehicle settings
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
1

Maintenance information settings
Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.

Vehicle customization
Detailed information: P. 809

Setting up intuitive parking assist
Detailed information: P. 269

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

351

Phone settings
Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
1

Phone sound settings
Detailed information: P. 535

Phonebook settings
Detailed information: P. 537

Message settings
Detailed information: P. 551

Phone display settings
Detailed information: P. 555

Bluetooth® Settings
Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.
1

Registered devices

Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
Detailed information: P. 565

Selecting portable player
Detailed information: P. 566

Detailed Bluetooth® settings
Detailed information: P. 567

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Detailed information: P. 559

352

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Audio settings
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
1

HD Radio™ system settings
Detailed information: P. 414

iPod settings
Detailed information: P. 488

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

353

Voice command system
The voice command system enables the navigation, audio/video,
hands-free and air conditioning systems to be operated using voice
commands.
For details of the navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.

◆ Talk switch
Press

To cancel, press and hold the talk
switch.

Press

To return to the previous screen.

◆ Microphone

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

◆ Back switch

354

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Voice command system operation
■

Voice command system operation
1

Press

After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been displayed, voice guidance will
commence.
Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing
.
2

After a beep sounds, say the
command of your choice.
Voice commands are marked with
.
Some commonly used commands
are displayed on the screen.
If you wish to display the commands displayed on the page in the
background, perform one of the
following:
• Say “Next page” or “Previous
page”.
• Select “Next Pg.” or “Prev. Pg.”
If you wish to display the “Main
Menu” screen when the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is displayed, perform one of the following:
• Say “Main menu”.
• Select “Main Menu”.
To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press
and hold

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands and operation methods.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen
3

355

Say the command displayed on
the screen.
If a desired outcome is not shown, or if
no selections are available, perform
one of the following to return to the
previous screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
• Press

To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press
and hold
■

Voice command example (search for a track using artist name or
album name)
1

Press

“Play Artist ” and “Play Album ” are displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.

Say “Play artist ” or “Play album ”.
Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If multiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed.
When “Play Artist ” is used to play music, the first track is selected randomly.

Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

356

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Natural speech information (English only)
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system
enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the
system cannot recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly
state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the
short cut menu.
■

Expression examples for each function
Command

Expression examples

“Call ”

Get me .
I need to call at
right away.

“Dial ”

Please
dial
the
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist ”

Play the artist .
I’d like to hear the band .*

“Play Album ”

Play album .
Music from album .*

number

*: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be
accessed from the main menu.
For example, to make an “International Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed. Then say “Use the phone” followed by saying the desired number, e.g. “123456789”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

357

Expanded voice commands
Selecting “On” next to “Expanded Voice Commands” on the “Voice Settings” screen enables voice command operation of the audio/video and
air conditioning system. (P. 349)
For more information on operations that can be controlled using
expanded voice commands, refer to “Command list”. (P. 358)
■

Voice command example (turn the audio system)
1

Press

Say “Audio on”.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

358

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Command list
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
● For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands

will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to
conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.
● Voice recognition language can be changed. (P. 339)
● Commands that have a “O” in the “Shortcut Menu” column in the fol-

lowing table can be recognized from the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
Commands that have a “—” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be
recognized from the screen that they are displayed in.
■

Calling a phone (P. 520)
Action

Shortcut
Menu

“Call ”

Calls made by saying a name from the
phonebook.
For example: Say “Call John Smith”,
“Call John Smith, mobile” etc.

“Dial ”

Calls made by saying the phone number.
For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial
5556667777” etc.

“International Call”*

Calls international numbers by saying
the phone number.

—

Command

*: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Shortcut Menu” screen is being displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

359

5-1. Remote Touch screen
■

Playing a music
Action

Shortcut
Menu

“Play Artist ”

Plays tracks by the selected artist.
For example: Say “Play artist
”*1

“Play Album ”

Plays tracks from the selected album.
For example: Say “Play album
”*1

“Play Song ”*2

Plays the selected track.
For example: Say “Play song Summertime”, “Play song Concerto in A Major”
etc.

—

“Play Playlist
”*2

Plays tracks from the selected playlist.
For example: Say “Play playlist My
Favorite Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic
Hits” etc.

—

Command

cut menu” screen is being displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Short-

360
■

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Select audio mode
When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (P. 349)
Command

Action

Shortcut
Menu

“Radio”

Sets the audio mode to radio.

“AM”

Selects the AM band.

“FM”

Selects the FM band.

“Satellite radio”

Selects the satellite radio mode.

“Disc”

Selects the disc audio mode.

“Auxiliary”

Selects the auxiliary audio mode.

“Bluetooth* audio”

Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode.

“iPod”

Selects the iPod audio mode.

“USB audio”

Selects the USB audio mode.

“Audio on”

Turns the audio system on.

“Audio off”

Turns the audio system off.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■

Air conditioning system command
When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (P. 349)
Action

Shortcut
Menu

Turns air conditioning system on and off.

“Warmer”

Turns temperature up.

“Cooler”

Turns temperature down.

Command
“Automatic
control”

climate

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

361

5-1. Remote Touch screen
■ Voice command system

● Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated

from the “Main Menu” screen.

● If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear,

press

and try again.

● Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting

when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing
a beep.

and hearing

■ If a voice command cannot be recognized
● If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance will

say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the screen) and
voice command reception will restart.

● If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice com-

mand guidance system will say “Paused. To restart voice recognition, push the talk
switch. To cancel voice recognition, push and hold the talk switch.” Voice recognition will then be suspended. Select “Cancel” or “Go Back”, or press

■ When selecting “Voice Prompts”

changed on the “Voice Settings” screen. (P. 349)

● Voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

again.

Interior features

● The voice recognition prompt can be set to on or off. This setting can also be

362

5-1. Remote Touch screen

■ When using the microphone
● It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.
● Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.
● Voice commands may not be recognized if:

• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
● In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly
and using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
■ When searching for a track
● A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and play-

back. (P. 477, 487)

● When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks

can be searched using voice commands.

● Recognition data is updated under the following conditions:

• When the USB memory or iPod data has changed.
• When the voice recognition language is changed. (P. 339)
● While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search cannot be performed using a voice command.
● While “Play Music” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, say “Play Music” to

display the music screen from which searching for a track using a voice command
can be performed.

● When “Play Music” is dimmed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible to

search for a track using a voice command. In this situation, reduce the amount of
music data in the USB memory or iPod and update the recognition data to enable
searching by voice command.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

363

■ Natural speech information
● The “Use the Phone” and “Play Music” commands displayed on the “Shortcut

Menu” screen can be operated using natural language speech recognition technology.

● If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will

be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that
was recognized.)

■ When turning the audio system or air conditioning system on
● Commands relating to operation of the audio/video and air conditioning systems

can only be performed when the audio/video and air conditioning systems are
turned on.

● Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu” screen

is displayed.

■ The Gracenote® media database

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

364

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Vehicles with a navigation system: The air conditioning system can be
displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate”
to display the air conditioning operation screen.
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the
system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger


365

Without rear air conditioning system

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

366


5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

With rear air conditioning system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

367

Fan speed control

Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.

Left-hand front seat side temperature control

Windshield defogger

Outside temperature

Right-hand front seat side temperature control

Outside air or recirculated
mode

Air outlet selector

S-FLOW mode

Off

Right-hand front seat side temperature display

Front seat air outlet selector

Automatic mode

Micro dust and pollen filter

DUAL/3-ZONE mode

Left-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off

Rear air conditioning operation
screen

Left-hand front seat side tem- 20 Right-hand front seat side air
perature display
outlet selector

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

368

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the speech command system
Press
to operate the speech
command system. (P. 353/“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”)

Using the automatic air conditioning system
1

Press

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are
automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.
2

Press

to switch to automatic air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3

Press “” on

to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the

temperature.


Without rear air conditioning system
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.



With rear air conditioning system
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 379) can be adjusted separately.
Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be adjusted separately depending on the temperature setting.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

369

Adjusting the settings manually


Without rear air conditioning system
1

To adjust the fan speed, select “” on

to increase the fan speed

and “” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.
Press
2

to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on

to increase the

temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s
side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
3

To change the air outlets,
select an air outlet switch on
the operation screen.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

370


5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

With rear air conditioning system
1

To adjust the fan speed, select “” on

to increase the fan speed

and “” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.
Press
2

to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on

to increase the

temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time
is selected.
When
is selected (the indicator on
is on) or the passenger’s
side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s,
front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 379) can be adjusted separately.
3

To change the air outlets,
select an air outlet switch on
the operation screen.
1

Left-hand front seat

Right-hand front seat

Different air outlets for the driver
and front passenger seats can be
chosen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

371

Defogging the windshield
Press

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may
switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side
windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
[

Air outlets and air flow

*: In “AUTO” mode, air may flow to the
feet as well as to the body to prevent
your feet from getting sweaty.

*
*

Upper body and feet

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Upper body

372

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Feet

*: When the warming function is operating, air flows to the upper body as well
to warm the upper body effectively.

*
*

Feet and windshield

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press

The mode switches among
(recirculated air mode), automatic and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system
operates automatically.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

373

Changing the rear seat settings (with rear air conditioning system)
■

Using the automatic mode

Select

.
.

The air conditioning system will
operate, and air outlets and speed
will be set automatically.

Select
ature.

to increase the temperature and

■

Adjusting the temperature setting

Select

Select
 (increase) or
(decrease) on the operation
screen.

The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time
is selected.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

to decrease the temper5

Interior features

374
■

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Disabling the switches on the rear armrest.
Select

Micro dust and pollen filter button
Operates micro dust and pollen filter on/off.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air flows
to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 1 to 3
minutes.

S-FLOW mode button
Operates S-FLOW mode on/off.
When the S-FLOW mode button is
pressed, the airflow changes as follows.
Without rear air conditioning system:
Air flows to the front seats only.
With rear air conditioning system: Air
flows to the front seats only, and if the
passenger seat is unoccupied, the set
temperature, outside humidity and
temperature inside the cabin are
assessed, and air flows to the driver
seat only.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

375

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
■

Front center outlets and front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

Rear seat outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■

376

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after
is pressed.
■ Humidity sensor

A sensor, which detects humidity inside the
vehicle and the temperature of the windshield, is provided to detect fog on the front
windscreen. Due to the sensor, when automatic mode is set the air conditioning may
make the following controls:
● Changing the amount of air flow
● Changing the amount of air introduced from

outside when in outside air mode with the air
vents in the

position

● Changing the settings of the air vents to

when the

is set

■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting

on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn

off, the windows may fog up more easily.

● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/

recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem-

perature setting or the inside temperature.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

377

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys-

tem is on

● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning

system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.

● Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is

turned on.

● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■ Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
● In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the

following may occur:

• Outside air mode does not switch to
(recirculated air) mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
.

● In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
● The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling

capacity

● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

is selected.

Interior features

● In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press

378

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and

accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.

● To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■ Air conditioning filter

P. 666
■ Customization

Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)

CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up

during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differDo not use
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
■ Humidity sensor

Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor:
● Do not disassemble the sensor
● Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sensor or subject it to strong impacts
● Do not stick anything on the sensor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

379

Rear air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.

Button lock display

Air outlet selector

Air outlet mode display

Off

Temperature display

Automatic mode

Temperature control

Interior features

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

380

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using automatic air conditioning system
1

Press

The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be
adjusted automatically.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.
2

Press “” on
the temperature.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

to increase the temperature and “” to decrease

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

381

Adjusting the settings manually
■

Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on

to increase the temperature and “” to decrease

the temperature.
■

Changing the air outlets
Press

The air outlets change as follows each time

is pressed.

Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.

Upper body

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Upper body and feet

382

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Feet

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
(Rear center outlets)
1

Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

383

■ Button lock function

To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons
on the rear armrest can be locked. Press
until you hear a beep to lock the buttons. Pressing
again until you hear a
beep will release the lock.
The indicator appears on the display when the
buttons are locked.
■ Rear control panel illumination off function

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest
can be turned off. Press
until you hear a
beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
again until you hear a beep will turn the
illumination on.
5

■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

NOTICE

384

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn
off after 15 to 60 minutes. The operation time changes according to the
ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.

■ Operating conditions

The power switch must be in the ON mode.

CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn the defoggers off when the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

385

Windshield wiper de-icer
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield
and wiper blades.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (P. 328)

Select “Climate” on the “Menu”
screen.

ON/OFF
5

Interior features

Select
to turn on the windshield
wiper de-icer. The windshield wiper
de-icer will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes. Selecting
again also turns the de-icer off.

■ Operating conditions

The power switch must be in the ON mode.

CAUTION
■ When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

386

5-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type
CD and DVD player with AM/FM radio
Vehicles with a navigation system: The audio functions can be displayed
and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.


Using the instrument panel
Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio control
screen.



Using the Remote Touch
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, select “Radio” or
“Media” and select each tab to display the audio control screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

387

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

388

5-3. Using the audio system

Title

Page

Using the radio

P. 409

Using the CD/DVD player

P. 433

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs

P. 435

Playing DVD video

P. 441

CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information

P. 453

Listening to Bluetooth® audio

P. 465

Listening to a USB memory

P. 475

Listening to an iPod

P. 485

Optimal use of the audio/video system

P. 495

Using the AUX port

P. 497

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 503

Using the voice command system
Press
to operate the voice
command system. (P. 353“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

389

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
■ When using the Remote Touch screen

Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
■ Tab

Select
or
, located either side of the screen tabs, to display tabs from the previous or next page.
■ About Dolby

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

CAUTION
■ For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules

● Laser products

• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

390

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Open source license

This product uses the following open source software.
● T-Kernel

This Product uses the Source Code of T-Kernel under T-License granted by the
T-Engine Forum (www.t-engine.org).
● C Library

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors. This product includes software developed by the University of
California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1988 University of Utah.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

391

Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by the Systems
Programming Group of the University of Utah Computer Science Department and
Ralph Campbell.
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Arthur
David Olson of the National Cancer Institute.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.

Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Berkeley Software
Design, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

392

5-3. Using the audio system

© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91-66 and contributed
to Berkeley. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell. This
file is derived from the MIPS RISC Architecture book by Gerry Kane.
Copyright © 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Andrew Hume of
AT&T Bell Laboratories.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

393

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.

394

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment
Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

395

This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its
contributors.
Copyright © 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.
Conklin.
Copyright © 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.
Conklin.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

396

5-3. Using the audio system

Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code was contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Copyright © 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
J. Klein.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Julian
Coleman.
Copyright © 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Dieter
Baron and Thomas Klausner.
Copyright © 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by
Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

397

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
Christos Zoulas.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

398

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
Winning Strategies, Inc.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

399

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

400

5-3. Using the audio system

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author: Chris
G. Demetriou
Copyright © 1995, 1996 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author:
Chris G. Demetriou
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is
hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any
portions thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

401

CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS ““AS
IS”” CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF
ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to Software Distribution
Coordinator or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU School of Computer
Science Carnegie Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 any improvements
or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the rights to redistribute these
changes.
● TCP/IP, Socket Library

This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors.
Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.

Interior features

Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

402

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 2004 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””) Portions
Copyright © 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium. Permission to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment
Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific, written prior permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

403

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors.
Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.

4. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
WIDE Project and its contributors.

404

5-3. Using the audio system

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

405

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the
above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that
any documentation and other materials related to such distribution and use
acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,
Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Rights, responsibilities and use of this software are controlled by the agreement
found in the ““LICENSE.H”” file distributed with this source code. ““LICENSE.H””
may not be removed from this distribution, modified, enhanced nor references to it
omitted.
Copyright 1983 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984, 1985 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPort Software.

Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1986 by Carnegie Mellon
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU
not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

406

5-3. Using the audio system

● OpenSSL

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

407

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is
free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it
the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as
such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used
in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

408

5-3. Using the audio system

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left
out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

409

Using the radio
Press the “RADIO” button to display the radio control screen.
Select the “AM”, “FM”, “SAT” or “Apps” tab or press the “RADIO” button repeatedly to select the desired tab.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

410

5-3. Using the audio system

AM/FM/SAT/Apps mode tabs

AM/FM/SAT/Apps mode button

Scanning for receivable stations

Setting the sound (P. 495)

Power

Mute

Volume

Adjusting the frequency

Preset stations

Preset turning/seeking the frequency

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

411

Selecting a station (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■

Seek tuning
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

■

Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob.

■

Preset stations
Select the desired preset stations (1 - 6).
Change the page by using “” or “” on the screen.

Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations.

Select one of the left side screen
buttons (1-6) and hold it until a
beep is heard. There are 6 sets of
6 presets. There is a total of 36
presets.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

412

5-3. Using the audio system

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Scanning all radio stations within range
1

Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The radio will find the next station and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD
Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is selected, and then scan again.
(P. 414)

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data Systems)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■

Receiving RBDS broadcasts
1

Select “Options”
screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

the

5-3. Using the audio system
2

413

Select “< TYPE” or “TYPE >”
on the screen.

The program list changes as follows each time the switch is selected.

Select “TYPE SEEK” on the screen.
The radio seeks for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be found, “no type” appears on the screen.

■

Traffic announcement
Select “Traffic” on the screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio seeks a traffic
program station.
If no traffic program station is
found, “No Traffic” appears on the
display.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

• Classical
• Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
• Jazz
• News
• Oldies
• Other
• Pop Music
• Religion
• Rock
• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
• Sports
• Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog.)
• Alert (Emergency Alert)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.

414

5-3. Using the audio system

HD Radio™ system
■

Settings HD Radio™ system
HD Radio™ system can be set using the procedure outlined below.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

Select “Audio”.

Select “HD Radio Settings”.

Select “HD Radio/Analog Setting”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system
5

415

Select the item to be set.
“All”: Select to receive both analog
and digital broadcasts.
“HD Only”: Select to receive only
digital broadcasts.
“Analog”: Select to receive only
analog broadcasts.

6
■

Select “Save”.

Trademark owned

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.

416

5-3. Using the audio system

HD Radio™ Technology
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives.
Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as
digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system
■

417

Using HD Radio™ Technology
1

Press the “RADIO” button.

Select the “AM” or “FM” tab or
press the “RADIO” button
repeatedly to select the
desired tab.
An orange “HD)” logo indicator
will be displayed on the screen
when in digital.
The song title, artist name and
music genre will appear on the
screen when available by the radio
station.

Select “Options” to display this
screen.

When “< TYPE” or “TYPE >” is
selected, a program type will be
searched. Once a program type
has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will
appear on the screen. (P. 412)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When “Text” is selected, information such as the artist name, song
title, album title and music genre of
the track being listened to are displayed on the text screen. To display messages from the station,
select “Additional Information”.

418

5-3. Using the audio system

Available HD Radio™ Technology
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have “multiple” or supplemental programs on one FM station.
■

Multicast
Select “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is selected,
the
supplemental
program
changes.
If “Multicast” is selected when
tuned to the last of the supplemental programs, the main program will
be returned to.

■

Tag
1

Select “Tag” to bookmark the
music information.

Open the console box, open the cover and connect an iPod using an
iPod cable. (P. 487)

Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs
which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may
decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their
radio.
If tagging the music information fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

419

XM® Satellite Radio
■

Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
1

Press the “RADIO” button.

Select the “SAT” tab or press
the “RADIO” button repeatedly until the “SAT” tab is
selected to choose a satellite
broadcast channel.

Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous channel.
Turning the knob quickly allows rapid scrolling through the channel list.

■

Presetting XM® Satellite Radio channels
Select the desired channel.

Select one of the left side
screen buttons (1-6) and hold it
until a beep is heard.
To change the preset channel to a
different one, follow the same procedure.

■

Changing the channel category
Select either “< TYPE” or “TYPE
>” to go to the next or previous
category.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

420
■

5-3. Using the audio system

Seeking the channel within the current category
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.

■

Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
Scanning channels in the current category
1

Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.

2
■

Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is reached.

Displaying the title and artist name
Select “Text” to display the song
title and artist name currently
being listening to.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully displayed.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

421

Internet radio broadcast (vehicles with the navigation system)
One of Apps’ features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to
use this service, an Apps compatible phone and the navigation system
need to be set. For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
1

Press the “RADIO” button.

Select the “Apps” tab or press the
“RADIO” button repeatedly until
the “Apps” tab is selected.
If a compatible phone is already registered, it will be connected automatically.

When connection is complete, the
application screen can be displayed.
3

Select “View Application Screen” on the screen.
The internet radio application screen is displayed.
Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
By pressing the “RADIO” button, the “Audio” screen can be returned to.

Silencing the sound
Press

Press the button again to turn the system back on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

If a compatible phone has not been
registered or the Bluetooth® connection cannot be completed correctly,
select “Connect” to register and/or
connect your phone. (P. 515)

422

5-3. Using the audio system

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.
■ When the 12-volt battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely

affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.

● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually

changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio

reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

■ HD Radio™ Technology troubleshooting guide

Experience
Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.

Cause

Action

The radio stations analog
and digital volume are not None, radio broadcast
properly aligned or the issue. A user can contact
station is in ballgame the radio station.
mode.

Reception issue, may
clear-up as the vehicle
Sound fades, blending in Radio is shifting between continues to be driven.
and out.
analog and digital audio. Selecting “Analog” can
force radio in an analog
audio.
This is normal behavior,
Audio mute condition
The radio does not have wait until the digital signal
when an HD2/HD3 mulaccess to digital signals at returns. If out of the covticast channel had been
the moment.
erage area, seek a new
playing.
station.
The digital multicast content is not available until
Audio mute delay when HD Radio™ broadcast This is normal behavior,
selecting an HD2/HD3 can be decoded and wait for the audio to
multicast channel preset. make the audio available. become available.
This takes up to 7 seconds.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Experience

Cause

423

Action

Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
Text information does not
Data service issue at the form: www.ibiquity.com/
match the present song
automotive/
radio broadcaster.
audio.
report_radio_station_
experiences.
Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
No text information
Data service issue by the form: www.ibiquity.com/
shown for the present
automotive/
radio broadcaster.
selected frequency.
report_radio_station_
experiences.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

424

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system for

U.S.A.)

● Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to
XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com.
● Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles without a navigation sys-

tem for U.S.A.)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com.
XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. © 2011 Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their
respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987
● Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. If
“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8
alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID
code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying
the radio ID and the specific radio code.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

425

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a naviga-

tion system for U.S.A.)

● Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may

apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. XM
service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

426

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system

for Canada)

● Radio and Entertainment

tem for Canada)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.ca.
XM service only available in 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective
owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987
● Radio ID

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

427

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a naviga-

tion system for Canada)

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at www.xmradio.ca. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States
and Canada*.

*Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.

Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
Canadian Customers — Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

428

5-3. Using the audio system

■ XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles with a navigation system)
● Radio and Entertainment

XM offers a variety of advanced Infotainment and data services.
■ XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles with a navigation system)

For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some Infotainment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions
sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer
Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada)
XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos
are the property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
 U.S.A. Customers:

Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987
 Canadian Customers:

Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987
● Radio ID

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

429

■ XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles with a navigation

system)

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only
available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada*.

*Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.

Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987
 Canadian Customers:

Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987

Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

430

5-3. Using the audio system

■ If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

Ck Antenna

Ch Unauth

The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the
XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding
antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “CH
000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. To listen to the
premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.

No Signal

The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait
until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait
until the unit has received the information.

Ch Off Air

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action is
required.

Ch Unavail

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for
about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically,
select another channel.

Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

431

■ About internet radio (vehicles with the navigation system)
● Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio.
● An iPhone cannot be connected via Bluetooth® and USB connection at the same

time. However, it is possible to recharge an iPhone while using Apps by connecting
via USB. The system uses the connection method that was used last. Therefore, if
connected via USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to reconnect the
iPhone via Bluetooth®.

● Services requiring a separate contract can also be used. For details, refer to

http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

● If internet radio has never been listened to by activating “Apps” from the “Informa-

tion” screen, the “Apps” tab will be dimmed.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

432

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
● Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Consult the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
■ Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio

This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de
l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

433

Using the CD/DVD player

Interior features

Setting the sound (P. 495)

MEDIA button

Disc slot

Disc eject

Play/pause

Power

Track/file selection

Volume

Track, file and chapter selection/fast forward/rewind

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

434

5-3. Using the audio system

Inserting a disc
Insert a disc into the disc slot.

Ejecting a disc
Press

and remove the disc.

Playing and pausing a track/file/chapter
To play or pause a track/file/chapter, press

■ Using the display
● Under extremely cold conditions, the screen may react slowly or operation sound

may become louder.

● If a disc is inserted with the label facing down, it cannot be played.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

435

Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc
slot.
Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.

Control icon screen


Audio CD mode



MP3/WMA discs mode

Random playback

Repeat play

Pause
Select

to play

Setting the sound (P. 495)

Selecting a track

Selecting a folder

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

436

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track (Audio CD)
■

Selecting a track
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.

■

Selecting a track from the track list
1

Select the track name on the screen to display the CD’s track list.

Select the desired track number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.

■

Fast forwarding or rewinding a track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

437

Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA discs)
■

Selecting a folder
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder.

■

Selecting a folder from the folder list
1

Select the folder name on the screen to display the following folder
list screen.

Select the desired folder number to display the folder’s file
list. From the file list, select the
desired file number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 folder groups.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the folder list.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.

438

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file (MP3/WMA discs)
■

Selecting a file
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file.
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number.

■

Selecting a file from the file list
1

Select the file name on the screen to display the following file list
screen.

Select the desired file number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 file groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the file list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the file list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.

■

Fast forwarding or rewinding a file
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

439

Random playback
■

Audio CD
Select “RAND” on the screen.
“RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.

■

MP3/WMA disc
● Playing files from a particular folder in random order

Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off
● Playing all the files on a disc in random order

Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND” appears on the
screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
When a file is skipped or the system is inoperative, select “RAND” to reset.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

440

5-3. Using the audio system

Repeating a track
■

Audio CD
Select “RPT” on the screen.
“RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■

MP3/WMA disc
● Repeating a file

Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time is “RPT” selected, the mode changes as follows:
• When “RAND” is off
file repeat  folder repeat  off
• When “RAND” is on
file  repeat off
● Repeating all of the files in a folder

Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.
■ Displaying the title and artist name (Audio CD)

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
32 characters can be displayed.
■ Error messages

P. 453

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

441

Playing DVD video
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when
the vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode and the parking brake applied. While driving in
DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.
When a DVD video disc is inserted while driving, the audio contents of
the main feature will automatically be played. However, some discs may
not be played from the main story.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc
slot.
Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

442

5-3. Using the audio system

Control icon screen


Vehicles without a navigation
system

Option screen appears (P. 443)

Display menu control key (P. 444)

Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped
and the parking brake is applied)

Rewind

Stop

Pause
Select

Vehicles with a navigation system

Menu screen appears

to play

Fast forward

Setting the sound (P. 495)
If



is selected, while watching a DVD, the DVD controls will appear.

If
appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation relevant to the control is not permitted.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

443

DVD options screen
Select “Options” on “DVD” screen, the following screen appears.
Vehicles without a navigation
system

Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped
and the parking brake is applied)

Search by title/group number

Change audio language

Change angle

Display the predetermined scene and start playing from there

Change subtitle language

Change screen size

Display the image quality adjustment screen

Change initial setting



Vehicles with a navigation system

If
appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation relevant to the control is not permitted.

Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc
Select and hold

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

on the control icon screen.

Interior features



444

5-3. Using the audio system

Using the DVD menu
1

Select “Menu” or “Top Menu” on the control icon screen.
Select if the menu control key does not appear on the menu screen.

Select the menu item using
,
,
or
and select
“Enter”.
: Returns to the previous screen

Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)

Searching for a desired screen
■

Searching by title
1

Select “Search” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Input the desired title number
and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input number
: Returns to the previous
screen

■

Searching by chapter
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

445

Changing the subtitle language
1

Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
The languages available are restricted
to those available on the DVD disc.
“Hide”:Hides the subtitles
: Returns to the previous screen

Changing the audio language
1

Select “Audio” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.

: Returns to the previous screen

Changing the angle (if the angle option is available)
1

Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Each time you select “Change”,
the next available angle is
selected.
The angles available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
: Returns to the previous screen

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The languages available are restricted
to those available on the DVD disc.

446

5-3. Using the audio system

Changing screen size
1

Select “Wide” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Select the desired display. After
setting, select “Save”.
1

Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black

Widens the 3 : 4 screen horizontally to fill the screen

Widens the 3 : 4 screen vertically and horizontally, in the
same ratio, to fill the screen
: Returns to the previous
screen

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

447

Adjusting the screen
1

Select “Display” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Select “<” or “>” to display the
desired item to be adjusted, and
then select “OK”.
The screen goes off when “Screen
Off” is selected. To turn the display
screen back on, select any button. The
selected screen appears.
R

Red

Green

Tone

Lighter

Darker

Contrast

Weaker

Stronger

Brightness

Darker

Brighter

Color

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

448

5-3. Using the audio system

Initial DVD settings
■

Displaying “DVD Settings” screen
1

Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD Options” screen.

Select the setting to be changed.

After you change the settings,
select “Save”.
“Default”: Restores default settings
: Returns to the previous
screen

■

Setting audio language
1

Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select the desired language to be heard on the “Audio Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)

■

Setting subtitle language
1

Select “Subtitle Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select the desired language to be read on the “Subtitle Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system
■

449

Setting menu language
1

Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select the desired language to be read on the “Menu Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)

■

Setting angle mark
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.

■

Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select “On” or “Off”.

Setting parental lock
1
2

Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Input the 4-digit personal code on the “Key Code” screen.
If you enter wrong numbers, select

■

Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.
(P. 456)

Setting the auto start
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically
start playing.

■

Select “Auto Start Playback” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select “On” or “Off”.

Setting sound dynamic range
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can
be adjusted.
1

Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the “DVD Settings” screen.

Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

to delete the numbers.

450
■

5-3. Using the audio system

Entering a language code
If you select “Other” on the “Audio Language” screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or “Menu Language” screen you can select a language
by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.
Input the 4-digit language code
and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input digit
: Returns to the previous screen

● Language codes
Code

Language

Code

Language

Code

Language

0514

English

0207

Bulgarian

0712

Galician

0618

French

0208

Bihari

0714

Guarani

0405

German

0209

Bislama

0721

Gujarati

0920

Italian

0214

Bengali,
Bangla

0801

Hausa

0519

Spanish

0215

Tibetan

0809

Hindi

2608

Chinese

0218

Breton

0818

Croatian

1412

Dutch

0301

Catalan

0821

Hungarian

1620

Portuguese

0315

Corsican

0825

Armenian

1922

Swedish

0319

Czech

0901

Interlingua

1821

Russian

0325

Welsh

0905

Interlingue

1115

Korean

0401

Danish

0911

Inupiak

0512

Greek

0426

Bhutani

0914

Indonesian

0101

Afar

0515

Esperanto

0919

Icelandic

0102

Abkhazian

0520

Estonian

0923

Hebrew

0106

Afrikaans

0521

Basque

1001

Japanese

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

Code

Language

Code

Language

Code

Language

Amharic

0601

Persian

1009

Yiddish

0118

Arabic

0609

Finnish

1023

Javanese

0119

Assamese

0610

Fiji

1101

Georgian

0125

Aymara

0615

Faroese

1111

Kazakh

0126

Azerbaijani

0625

Frisian

1112

Greenlandic

0201

Bashkir

0701

Irish

1113

Cambodian

0205

Byelorussian

0704

ScottishGaelic

1114

Kannada

1119

Kashmiri

1415

Norwegian

1914

Shona

1121

Kurdish

1503

Occitan

1915

Somali

1125

Kirghiz

1513

(Afan)
Oromo

1917

Albanian

1201

Latin

1518

Oriya

1918

Serbian

1214

Lingala

1601

Panjabi

1919

Siswati

1215

Laothian

1612

Polish

1920

Sesotho

1220

Lithuanian

1619

Pashto,
Pushto

1921

Sundanese

1222

Latvian,
Lettish

1721

Quechua

1923

Swahili

1307

Malagasy

1813

RhaetoRomance

2001

Tamil

1309

Maori

1814

Kirundi

2005

Telugu

1311

Macedonian

1815

Romanian

2007

Tajik

1312

Malayalam

1823

Kinyarwanda

2008

Thai

1314

Mongolian

1901

Sanskrit

2009

Tigrinya

1315

Moldavian

1904

Sindhi

2011

Turkmen

1318

Marathi

1907

Sango

2012

Tagalog

1319

Malay

1908

SerboCroatian

2014

Setswana

Interior features

0113

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

451

452

5-3. Using the audio system

Code

Language

Code

Language

Code

Language

1320

Maltese

1909

Sinhalese

2015

Tongan

1325

Burmese

1911

Slovak

2018

Turkish

1401

Nauru

1912

Slovenian

2019

Tsonga

1405

Nepali

1913

Samoan

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

2209

Vietnamese

2515

Yoruba

2111

Ukrainian

2215

Volapük

2621

Zulu

2118

Urdu

2315

Wolof

2126

Uzbek

2408

Xhosa

■ When a rear passenger selects set up menu

Follow the directions on the warning screen that is displayed.
Under the same condition, the rear passenger can cancel the set up operation from
the front seat.
■ Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player’s region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 453

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

453

CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information
Error messages
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the
problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
The error messages may differ from those shown below depending on the
language selected.
Message
No disc found.

Cause

Correction
Procedures

There is no disc in the
Insert a disc.
player.

• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc correctly.
• Confirm the disc is
playable with the
player.

DISC Error

• There is a malfunction
within the system.
• Operation is stopped
due to a high temperature inside the player.

• Eject the disc.
• Eject the disc and
allow the player to
cool down.

No music files found.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

This indicates that no
playable data is included Eject the disc.
in the disc.

Interior features

Check DISC

• The disc is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc is inserted
upside down.
• The disc is not playable with the player.

454

5-3. Using the audio system

DVD video discs
● The DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD

video discs conforming to another format such as SECAM cannot
be used.
● Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating

the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD
player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this
player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD
video disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.
■ Symbols shown on DVD video discs

Symbol
NTSC/PAL

Meaning
Indicates NTSC/PAL format
Indicates the number of audio tracks

Indicates the number of language subtitles

Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

455

■ Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable
on your player:
● SACD
● dts CD
● Copy-protected CD
● DVD audio
● Video CD
● DVD-R
● DVD+R
● DVD-RW
● DVD+RW
■ CD/DVD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.
■ If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended

periods

Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

● DVD-RAM

456

5-3. Using the audio system

■ DVD video disc information
● DVD video discs

A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate
encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multiangle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.

● Viewer restrictions

This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of
the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

● Multi-angle option

You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.

● Multi-language option

You can select the subtitle and audio languages.

● Region codes

The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video
disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the
disc on the DVD player. (P. 454)

● Audio

This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.

● Title and chapter

Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title
and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

457

■ Sound

Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
■ MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

458

5-3. Using the audio system

● WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used:
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Discs containing multi-session recordings

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

459

● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
● Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

● Playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending
on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

460

5-3. Using the audio system

■ The Gracenote® media database
● Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®.

Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One
or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

■ Gracenote® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”)
enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain musicrelated information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote
Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

461

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these
restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
Gracenote service.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS
IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.

462

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ DVD video precaution

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio
source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

463

NOTICE
■ Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
● Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm)

● Low-quality or deformed discs

recording area

● Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

● Discs with a transparent or translucent

464

5-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE
■ Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
● Do not apply oil to the player.
● Store discs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

465

Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a
portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable
of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player
does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not
function.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a Bluetooth® audio player has already
been connected.
Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until
the “BT Audio” tab is selected.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

466

5-3. Using the audio system

Folder/album selection

Play/pause

Track selection

Repeat play

Displays folder/album list

Displays track list

Track selection/fast forward/
rewind

Connection status

MEDIA button

Connecting Bluetooth® audio
player

Power

Volume

Setting the sound (P. 495)

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

467

5-3. Using the audio system

Status display
You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on
the screen.
1

Connection status

Battery charge

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Conditions
Good

No
connection

Full

Empty

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

468

5-3. Using the audio system

Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to enter your portable
player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the
vehicle’s audio system. (P. 566)
For the operation procedure for the portable player, consult your player’s
accompanying instruction manual.
■

When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned on
When the portable player is on standby for the connection, it will be
automatically connected whenever the power switch is in either
ACCESSORY or ON mode.

■

When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off
Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following
procedure.
1

Select “Connect”.

Select the desired portable
player.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system
3

469

When the connection is completed, this screen is displayed. It is now possible to use
the portable player.

Playing Bluetooth® audio
Select
to play, select
to
pause or press
to play/pause.
Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

470

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a track/folder/album
■

On the audio top screen
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder/album.

■

On the playlist screen
1

Select the album name on the
screen to display the playlist
screen.

Select the desired screen button.
If the folder name on the screen is selected, the track list screen is displayed.

Select the desired track name
on the screen.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track/folder groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the track/folder list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

471

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track
■

On the audio top screen
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track number.

■

On the track list screen
1

Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list
screen.

, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■

Fast forwarding and rewinding a track
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to fast forward
or rewind.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the track list.

472

5-3. Using the audio system

Random playback
■

Playing the tracks on the album in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
album random  all track random  off

■

Playing tracks from all the albums in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.

Repeat play
■

Repeating a track
Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
track repeat  album repeat  off

■

Repeating an album
Select “RPT” repeatedly until “ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.
■ Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
● Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects a

Bluetooth® audio player. (P. 566)

● When none of the selectable portable players have been registered, a screen con-

firming registration is displayed. The registration method is the same as phone registration. (P. 559)

● When the currently connected portable player is selected, a screen confirming the

selected player’s disconnection is displayed. (P. 559)

● If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is dis-

played. If connection fails 2 or more times, a message will be displayed. When this
message is displayed, try again.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

473

■ When using the Bluetooth® audio system
● In the following conditions, the system may not function.

• The portable player is turned off
• The portable player is not connected
• The portable player battery is low
● There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
play.
● Depending on the type of portable player that is connected to the system, opera-

tion may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.

■ Bluetooth® antenna

The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the portable player is behind the seat
or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the portable player, and this system
does not have a charging function.
■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

474

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Compatible models

Portable players must correspond to the following specifications:
● Bluetooth® specification

Ver. 1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)

● Profile

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable player. Also, the different screen is displayed depending on which portable
player is connecting.
Please go to the website at http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved portable players
for this system.
■ Certification

P. 512
■ Reconnecting the portable player

If the portable player is disconnected with a poor reception when the power switch is
in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable
player.
If you have switched off the portable player yourself, follow the instructions below to
reconnect:
● Select the portable player again
● Enter the portable player
■ When transferring ownership of your vehicle

Be sure to remove the registered portable player from the system. (P. 561)

CAUTION
■ While driving

Do not use the portable player or connect the Bluetooth® system.

NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the portable player.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

475

Listening to a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB memory has already been connected. Select the “USB” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly
until the “USB” tab is selected.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

476

5-3. Using the audio system

Folder/album selection

Repeat play

Track/file selection

Displays folder/album list

Track and file selection/fast forward/rewind

Displays track/file list

MEDIA button

Setting the sound (P. 495)

Power

Play/pause

Volume

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

477

Connecting the USB memory
1

Open the console box, open the
cover and connect a USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory
if it is not turned on.

Press the “MEDIA” button.

Playing a USB memory
■

Play/pause

Select


to play, select

to pause or press

Tag mode



to play/pause.

Folder mode

Interior features

Selecting a folder/album
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to
select the next/previous folder/
album.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

478

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a folder, artist or album
1

Select the folder/album name on
the screen.

Select the desired tab and select
the desired folder, artist or album.
Character screen buttons, “ABC”,
“DEF” etc., allow a direct jump to list
entries that begin with the same letter
as the character button.
Each time the same character screen
button is selected, the list starting with
the subsequent character is displayed.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 folder/artist/album groups.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to quickly scroll up or down the folder/
artist/album list.
, : If appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is too
long for the screen. Select to scroll
to the end of the name. Select
to
move to the beginning of the name.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

479

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track
■

Selecting one file/track at a time
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file/track.
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired file/track.

■

Selecting a file/track from the list
1

Select the file/track name on the screen to display the following file/
track list screen.

Select the desired file/track
number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 file/track groups.

“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to quickly scroll up or down
the file/track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■

Fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the file/track list one
by one.

480

5-3. Using the audio system

Random playback
■

Playing files/tracks from a particular folder in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
random (1 folder/album random)  folder/album random (all folders/
albums random)  off

■

Playing the all folders/albums from a USB memory in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears
on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.

Repeat play
■

Repeating a file/track
Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
● When “RAND” is off

file/track repeat  folder/album repeat  off

● When “RAND” is on

file/track repeat  off

■

Repeating a folder/album
Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT”/“ALB.RPT” appears on the
screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
Available except when random playback is selected

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

481

■ If you select

The display returns to the previous screen.
■ USB memory functions
● When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB

memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If
the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB memory will resume playing from the same point it was last
used.

● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again
may resolve some malfunctions.

■ When using a USB memory

You may be unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the USB memory is
connected to the USB port at the same time.
■ Error messages for USB memory

“USB Error”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“No music files found.”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.
● Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.

● Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play
correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
•
•
•
•

Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
Maximum number of files per folder: 255

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ USB memory

482

5-3. Using the audio system

● MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.

● MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the
extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

483

● MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB
memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or
WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend
that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any
unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If
the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was
last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

484

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ While driving

Do not connect an USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the USB memory or its terminal
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside of the vehicle

may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it

is connected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

485

Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has already been connected.
Select the “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“iPod” tab is selected.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

486

5-3. Using the audio system

Track selection

Track selection/fast forward/
rewind

Displays track list

Selecting a play mode

MEDIA button

Setting the sound (P. 495)

Power

Play/pause

Volume

Repeat play

Random playback

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

487

Connecting an iPod
1

Open the console box, open
the cover and connect an iPod
using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.

Press the “MEDIA” button.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

488

5-3. Using the audio system

Cover art display settings
When the track currently being played has cover art data, it can be displayed.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Setup”
on the “Menu” screen.

Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “iPod Settings”.

Select “Display Cover Art”

Select “On” or “Off”.

After iPod setting has been changed, select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

489

Playing iPod
■

Play/pause
Select
to play, select
to
pause or press
to play/
pause.

■

Selecting a play mode
1

Select “Browse”.

Select the desired play mode.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

490

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track
■

Selecting one track at a time
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track.

■

Selecting a track from the list
1

Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list
screen.

■

Fast forwarding or rewinding a track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

491

Random playback
■

Playing tracks in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
track shuffle  album shuffle  off

■

Playing the albums in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.

Repeat play
Select “RPT” on the screen.
“RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■ If you select
■ About iPod

● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.

● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The display returns to the previous screen.

492

5-3. Using the audio system

■ iPod cover art
● Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.

This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 488)

● It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while

the cover art display is in process.

● Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
■ iPod functions
● When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only

output the sound by selecting “Video” on the “iPod” screen.

● Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the

iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not

be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve the problem.

■ When using an iPod

You maybe unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the iPod is connected
to the USB port at the same time.
■ Battery charge

When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its
battery.
■ Error messages for iPod

“iPod Error”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“No music files found.”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“Please check the iPod firmware version.”:
This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Perform the iPod firmware
updates and try again.
“iPod authorization failed.”:
This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

493

■ Compatible models

The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices
can be used with this system.
■ Made for

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.

494

5-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION
■ While driving

Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminal
● Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-

nected.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

495

Optimal use of the audio/video system
Select
settings.

to adjust the sound

■

“Sound” tab

2 3

4 5

6 7

Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance.

■

“DSP” tab

Automatic Sound
(ASL) on/off

Surround on/off

Levelizer

After sound setting has been changed, select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Select “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio balance.

496

5-3. Using the audio system

■ The sound quality level is adjusted individually

The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■ About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed, wind noise or other noise.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

497

Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
1

Open the console box, open the
cover and connect the portable
audio device.

Press the “MEDIA” button.
5

Select the “AUX” tab on the screen or press the “MEDIA” button
repeatedly to change to AUX mode.

■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments
must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

498

5-3. Using the audio system

Using the rear seat audio controls
Some front audio features can be controlled from the rear seats.

Display

Volume up/down

Power on/off

Selecting a track or file etc.

Selecting an audio source

Selecting a preset station or
folder etc.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

499

Turning the power on/off
Press

to turn the front audio system on.

Pressing the button again turns the system off.

Changing the audio source
Press
to change the audio source. The audio source as follows
each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if
the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped.
FM SAT Apps DVD player iPod or USB memory 
Bluetooth® audio player AUX AM

Adjusting the volume
Press “” on

to increase the volume and “” to decrease the vol-

Press and hold the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

ume.

500

5-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a radio station
■

Select a radio station
1

Press

to select a frequency band.

Press “” or “” on

to seek the frequency.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold
■

until you hear a beep.

Select a preset station
1

Press

to select a frequency band.

Press “” or “” on

to select a preset station.

Selecting a track
■

■

Audio CD
1

Press

to select the DVD player.

Press “” or “” on

to select a track.

Bluetooth® audio player
to select the Bluetooth® audio player.

Press

Press “” or “” on

to select an folder.

Press “” or “” on

to select a file.

iPod
1

Press

to select the iPod.

Press “” or “” on

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

to select a file.

5-3. Using the audio system

501

Selecting a chapter (DVD video mode)
1

Press

to select the DVD player.

Press “” or “” on

to select a chapter.

Selecting a file
■

MP3 disc or WMA disc
1

Press

to select the DVD player.

Press “” or “” on

to select a folder.

Press “” or “” on

to select a file.
5

■

USB memory
Press

to select the USB memory.

Press “” or “” on

to select a folder.

Press “” or “” on

to select a file.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

502

5-3. Using the audio system

■ Fast forwarding or rewinding a chapter or file

Press and hold “” or “” on

■ Button lock function

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■ Rear control panel illumination off function

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)
■ When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display

Refer to the following and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the disc or inside the player. The disc
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Eject the
disc and allow the player to cool down.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the disc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-3. Using the audio system

503

Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
1

Radio mode: Selects a radio station
Audio CD mode:
Selects a track
MP3/WMA disc mode:
Selects a file and
folder
DVD mode: Selects a chapter
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
USB memory mode:
Selects a file and
folder

Volume

Turns the power on, selects audio
source

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

iPod mode: Selects a track

504

5-3. Using the audio system

Turning on the power
Press

when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source
Press the
to select an audio mode.
Each press changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.

Adjusting the volume
Press

to increase the volume and

to decrease the volume.

Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Silencing a sound or pause the current operation
Press and hold

To cancel, press and hold

again.

Selecting the preset station/channel (radio)
1

Press

to select the radio mode.
or

to select.

Seeking a radio station/channel
1

Press

to select the radio mode.

Press and hold the

To cancel, press either switch.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

switch until you hear a beep.

5-3. Using the audio system

505

Selecting a track/file or chapter
1

Press

to select the audio CD, MP3/WMA disc, DVD, Blue-

tooth® audio, iPod, or USB memory mode.
2

Press

to select.

To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter, press the
switch once quickly.

Selecting an album
to select Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode.

Press

Press and hold

until a beep is heard to select.

Selecting a folder
5

Press

to select the MP3/WMA disc or USB memory mode.

Press and hold

until a beep is heard to select.

CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

506

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® cellular phones. Bluetooth® is a wireless data system that allows a cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and outgoing/incoming calls.
The illustrations of the hands-free system screens shown here may
slightly vary depending on the type of the system.
Vehicles with a navigation system: The hands-free system function can
be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

507

Telephone switch
1

Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display

On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call

Microphone
You can use the microphone when
talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can
be heard from the front speakers.
5

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in
the system. (P. 515)

508

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Steering switch
1

Adjusting the volume
Press

to increase the vol-

ume and
volume.

to decrease the

Hold the switch in that position to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
2

Back switch
Press

To return to the previous screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

509

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Status display
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
1

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Indicators

Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Good

No
connection

Full

Empty

Poor

Interior features

Connection status

Conditions

“Rm”: Roaming area
Excellent

510

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ When using the hands-free system
● The audio system is muted when making a call.
● If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
● If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
● Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
● In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

•
•
•
•
•
•

When driving on unpaved roads
When driving at high speeds
If a window is open
If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
If the air conditioning is set to high
There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone

■ Conditions under which the system will not operate
● If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
● If the cellular phone is turned off
● If you are outside service range
● If the cellular phone is not connected
● If the cellular phone’s battery is low
● When the cellular phone is not connected, “No connect” is displayed.
■ Bluetooth® antenna

The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the cellular phone is behind the seat
or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status
may deteriorate.
■ Battery charge/Signal status
● This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.
● When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by

radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

■ When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time

The following problems may occur.
● The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
● Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

511

■ About the phonebook in this system

The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
● Phonebook data
● Call history date
● Speed dial date
● Image data
● Messages
● Quick reply messages
● All phone settings

When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■ When you release your car

Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 347)
■ About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

512

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Compatible models

This system supports the following service.
● Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or

higher)

● Profiles

•
•
•
•
•

HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher)
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
SPP (Serial Port Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher*

*: This profile is necessary when using Apps. For details, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone, and take OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP service individually.
If the connected Bluetooth® phone version is older than recommended or incompatible, this function may not be used.
Please go to http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this
system.
■ Certification

FCC ID: AJDK041
IC: 775E-K041
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
For vehicles sold in Canada:
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

513

CAUTION
■ FCC WARNING

This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
7.9 in. (20 cm) or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif
rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités: mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

514

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

CAUTION
 For vehicles sold in Canada

Tout changement ou toute modification de la construction non approuvé expressément par l’abonné responsable de la conformité risque d’annuler l’autorité de
l’utilisateur d’exploiter l’équipement.
Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-implanté ou actionné en même temps qu’aucune
autre antenne ou émetteur.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
■ Caution while driving

Do not use the cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.

NOTICE
■ When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

515

Using a Bluetooth® phone
1

Device name

Bluetooth® connection status

Character deletion

Make a call

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone” or press

on the steering wheel.

Registering a Bluetooth® phone
You can register up to 5 phones in the system.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Yes”.
If 5 Bluetooth® devices have
already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted.
(P. 519)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

516

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3

Input the passcode displayed
on the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® phones. Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, a message confirming registration may
be displayed on the Bluetooth®
phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.
If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

517

Bluetooth® phone connection
There are two connection methods available — automatic and manual.
■

Automatic
When you register your phone,
auto connection will be activated.
Always set it to this mode and
leave the Bluetooth® phone on
the place where connection can
be established.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the phone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When the power switch is turned
to ACCESSORY or ON mode,
the system will search for a
nearby cellular phone you have
registered. The system will connect with the phone that was last
connected, if it is nearby.
When “Display Phone Status” is
set to “On”, the connection status
is displayed. (P. 569)

518

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■

Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned
off, you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Connect Phone”.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired
phone connection.
When the cellular phone’s device
name has not been able to be
obtained, “Device 1” to “Device 5”
will be displayed in the order the
phones were registered.

This screen is displayed.
If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

519

■ Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, it must
be connected manually, or the phone must be re-selected or re-entered.
■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
● Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
● It may take time to connect.
■ Connecting the phone while another Bluetooth® device is connected

When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, a confirmation message
will be displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”.
■ Connecting the phone while 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device
needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to delete one or more.
Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”, and “Yes”.
■ If the Bluetooth® phone has a Bluetooth® audio function

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When the Bluetooth® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this
audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and confirmation
message may be displayed. If this screen is displayed, select “Yes” to connect the
audio function or select “No” to cancel the connection.

520

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Making a call
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■

Dialing
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone number, select
.

Select

or press

on the steering wheel.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
■

Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each phone. Up to
1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 537)
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data to
call from the list.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
4

Choose the number and then
select
or press
the steering wheel.

■

521

When the phonebook is empty
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook cannot be transferred.



Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

PBAP compatible models
3

Select “Yes”.

Interior features



PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models
3

Select “Transfer”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

522

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
4

Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the Bluetooth® phone.
This screen appears while transferring. To cancel this function, select
“Cancel”.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.

■

When the data transfer from a
PBAP incompatible but OPP
compatible model is complete,
“Done” will appear on the
screen. Select “Done”.

Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
(P. 537)
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select the desired tab and
choose the desired number to
make a call.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

523

Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: All the numbers below which were memorized
“Missed”: Calls which you missed
“Incoming”: Calls which you received
“Outgoing”: Numbers which you called
You can call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All”
tab while driving.
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Select the desired tab and
choose the desired data from
the list.
5

Select
or press
the steering wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

524
■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Calling using voice recognition
You can call by giving a voice command. (P. 353)
Press

The “Call ” and “Dial ” operating procedures are
explained here. Other operating procedures are also similar.
● Calling by name

You can call by giving a name registered in the phonebook.
(P. 537)
1

Press

Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and
then after saying “Call” say the
desired name, or the name and
type of phone.

Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.
(You can also call by pressing

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

on the steering wheel.)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

525

● Calling by dial number

You can call by giving a phone number
1

Press

Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and
then after saying “Dial” say the
phone number.

Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.
(You can also call by pressing

■

on the steering wheel.)

Calling using SMS/MMS message
You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) message sender’s phone number.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Messages”.
When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be
displayed. Select “Yes”.

Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then select the desired received
message from the list.
The tab display may vary depending on the type of cellular phone.

4
■

Select

or press

on the steering wheel.

Calling using POI (vehicles with the navigation system)
You can make a call using a Point Of Interest.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

526

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Call history list
● If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone book,

the name is displayed in the call history.

● If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in

the call history.

● Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
■ When driving

The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(except for call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab) are
unavailable.
■ When calling by registered name in the phonebook
● When “Call ” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone-

book’s voice command recognition cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth® connection and if the contacts have been transferred to the system.

● Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change

names in the phonebook to full names.

● Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After

confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.

● When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candi-

date list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 and
number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.

● When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candi-

date list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of
the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list
(number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

527

■ When calling by phone number
● Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is

2345678, say “two three four five six seven eight”.

● The system can recognize the following types of phone numbers:

• 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
• 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
• 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)
• 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)
● As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number
without stopping.
● When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate

list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on
the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list (number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list

■ International calls

To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example an international number, use “International Call”.
1

Press
on the steering wheel to display the “Shortcut Menu” screen and saying “Main menu” or select “Main Menu”.

Say “Use a phone”.

Say “International call”.

Interior features

Up to 24 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the cellular phone in
use.
■ Calling by using the latest call history item
1

Press

on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.

Press

on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.

Press

on the steering wheel to select the most recent number in the history.

Select

or press

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

on the steering wheel.

528

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ To cancel voice recognition
● Press and hold
● Press

on the steering wheel.

● Select “Cancel”.
■ When using voice recognition

Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to recognize the desired command.

Receiving a call
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Select
or press
steering wheel.

■

To refuse a call
Select

■

on the

or press

on the steering wheel.

To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.

■ International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone in use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

529

Speaking on the phone
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

■

To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.

■

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

530
■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
1

Select “0-9” on the “Call” screen.

Input the number.
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phonebook, “Send”
and “Clear” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.

*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or
w, that come after the phone number.
(e.g. 056133w0123p#1✽)
3

Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.
If you select “Clear”, this function will end.

■

To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from hands-free call to cellular
phone call. Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone
call to hands-free call.

■

To hang up
Select

or press

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

on the steering wheel.

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

531

Call waiting
When a connected call is interrupted by the third party, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
● To talk with the other party: Select

or press

on the steer-

ing wheel.
● To refuse the call: Select

or press

on the steering wheel.

Everytime you select
or press
on the steering wheel after a
call is interrupted, you will be switched to the other party.
If your cellular phone is not accepted in HFP Ver. 1.5, this function cannot be used.
■ Transferring calls
● It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to a cellular phone while driving.
● If you transfer from a cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be

displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

● For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■ Repeated tone symbols

When the “p” pause tone is used, after waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until the
next pause tone will be automatically sent. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone
data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after user operation.
■ While driving

Key input is unavailable.
■ Voice recognition during a call

“Send Tones” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 353)
■ Interrupt call operation

Interrupt call operation may differ from depending on your phone company and the
cellular phone.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

● Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.

532

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Using a Bluetooth® phone message
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth®
phone, enabling checking and replying (Quick reply).
■

Checking a message
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone.
When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes”.

Select the desired message to
check.
The text of the message is not displayed while driving.
Selecting “Previous” or “Next” displays the previous or next message.

■

Select “Play” to start reading out of the message. Select “Stop” to
stop the function.

To adjust the message reading out volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.

■

Replying a message (Quick reply)
1

Select “Reply” on the desired
message screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
2

533

Select the desired message.
Select “Send”.
While the message is being sent, a
sending message screen is displayed.

■ To check the message
● Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s regis-

tered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.

● Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.
● When the received message is an e-mail and “Update Message Read Status on

Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be selected. Select
“Mark as Unread” to mark mails that have been read on the Bluetooth® phone as
unread. Conversely, select “Mark as Read” to mark mails that have not been read
on the Bluetooth® phone as read. (P. 551)

■ Calling using SMS/MMS message

■ If the message delivery failed

If message delivery has failed, a notification will be displayed on the screen.
Select “Retry” to attempt to send the message again or select “Cancel” to cancel.
■ Editing a quick reply message

You can edit the “Quick Reply Messages”. (P. 553)
■ New message notification

If “New Message Pop-up” and “New Message Voice Notification” are set to “On”, a
notification appears on the screen and a voice notification will be heard when a new
message arrives, select “Read” to check the message, also to check the message
later, select “Ignore”. When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to “On”, the message will be automatically read out. (P. 551)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging
Service) message sender’s phone number. (P. 525)

534

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
1

Phone sound settings

Phonebook settings

Message settings

Phone display settings

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup”
screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

535

Phone sound settings
■

Setting the volume
1

Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 534)

Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

Choose the volume setting
switch.
“Call Volume”:
speaker volume

changes

the

“Ring Tone Volume”: changes the
ring tone volume
4

When you complete all settings, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
select “OK”.

536
■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the ring tone
1

Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 534)

Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired ring
tone.
Ring tones can be heard by selecting the screen buttons, and then
“OK”.

When you complete setting, select “Save”.

■ Adaptive volume control

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume.
■ To return to the default phone sound settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

537

Phonebook settings
The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phonebooks in total. The data
for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in
each phonebook.
1

Setting the phonebook

Setting the speed dials

Deleting the call history

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

Setting the phonebook

● Transferring a phone number

You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones. If your
cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook
cannot be transferred.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■

538


5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer Contacts”.

Select “Update Contacts”.

Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the
Bluetooth® phone.
This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the cellular phone
model.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, select “Cancel”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)


539

PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

Select the item to be set.
“Automatically Download Contacts”: Transfer the phonebook
from a connected cellular phone.
“Automatically Download Call History”: transfer the call history from a
connected cellular phone.

Select “On”, and then “Save”.

For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Transfer Contacts”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features



540

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
4

Select “Replace Contacts” or
“Add Contacts”.
In the case that the phonebook
contains phonebook data, this
screen is displayed.

Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the
Bluetooth® phone.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, select “Cancel”.
If “Add Contacts” is selected and
there is an interruption during the
transfer of data, the phonebook
data transferred until then will be
stored in the system. Please note,
this is not the case when “Cancel” is
selected.

When the transfer is complete, “Done” will appear on the screen.
Select “Done”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

541

● Registering the phonebook data

You can register the phonebook data. Up to 3 numbers per person can
be registered. New phonebook data cannot be added for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones.
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “New Contact” on the “Contacts” screen.

Input the name, and select
“OK”.

Input the phone number, and
select “OK”.

Select the desired phone type.

When two or less numbers in total are registered to this contact, this
screen is displayed. When you want to add a number to this contact,
select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

If you want to use the tone signal
after the phone number, input the
tone signal too.

542

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

● Editing the phonebook data

You can register the phone number separately. Phonebooks cannot be
edited for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones.
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Edit Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

Choose the data to edit.

Select the desired name or
number.

Edit the name or number. After editing, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

543

● Deleting the phonebook data
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Delete Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

Choose the data to delete.

You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, select “Select All”.

Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

544

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Phonebook data

Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, delete all your data on the system.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete the phonebook data after setting “Automatically Download Contacts” to “Off”. (P. 539)
■ Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ When another Bluetooth® device is connected during transferring a phonebook
● For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones

If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring phonebook data,
depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected.

● For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones

When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be
displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

545

■ Transferring the phone number data in a different way
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.

The “Transfer Contacts” screen is displayed. The following operations are performed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.

■ Editing the phonebook data in a different way
● From “Contact” screen
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Edit” on the “Contact” screen.

Follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from step

. (P. 542)

● From “Call History” screen

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update Contact” on the “Call History” screen.

If you select “Add to Contacts”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from
step 5 . (P. 542)
If you select “Update Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data”
from step 4 . (P. 542)

■ Deleting the phonebook data in a different way (PBAP incompatible but OPP

compatible models)

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

■ When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted.

The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

546

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the speed dials
■

Registering the speed dial
You can register the desired phone number from the phonebook. Up to
18 numbers per phone can be registered.
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “New”.

Choose the data to register.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5

Select the desired phone number.

Select the switch you want to
register the number in.

If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message
will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.

Deleting the speed dial
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Select “Delete” on the “Speed Dials” screen.

Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, select “Select
All”.

Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■

547

548

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Setting the speed dials in a different way
● To display the “Speed Dials” screen
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.

● To display the “Contacts” screen
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.

Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.

■ Registering the speed dial in a different way
● From “Speed Dial” screen
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.

Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select the desired phone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step

. (P. 546)

● From “Contact” screen
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.

Choose the desired data from the list.

Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.

Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.

Select the desired phone number.

Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

549

Deleting call history
The call history can be deleted. For PBAP compatible phones, delete the
call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to “Off”.
(P. 539)
1

Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)

Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.

Choose the desired history to
delete.

Choose the data to delete.

To delete all data, select “Select
All”.

Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.

550

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Deleting call history in a different way
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.

Follow the steps “Deleting call history” from step

. (P. 549)

■ Deleting after call history has been displayed
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.

Select the desired history to delete.

Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

551

Message settings
You can change the message settings.


Page 1



Page 2

Message forwarding from cellular phone on/off

New message notification display on/off

New message voice notification on/off

Changing new message notification volume

Changing new message voice notification tone

Automatic message read out function on/off

Changing a message read out volume

Cellular phone’s message read and unread status update function on/
off

Editing “Edit Quick Reply Messages”

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Messaging Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

552
■

■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing the new message notification volume
1

Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)

Select “New Message Notification Volume” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
“OK”.

When you complete setting, select “Save”.

Changing the new message notification tone
1

Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)

Select “New Message Notification Tone” on the “Messaging Settings” screen.

Select the desired new message notification tone.
New message notification tones
can be heard by selecting the
screen buttons, and then “OK”.

When you complete setting, select “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

■

553

Changing the message read out volume
1

Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)

Select “Message Readout Volume” on the “Messaging Settings”
screen.

Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
“OK”.

When you complete setting, select “Save”.

Editing the quick reply messages
Quick reply messages can be edited. 15 messages have already been
stored.
Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)

Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages” on the “Messaging Settings”
screen.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired
message.

Edit the message. After editing, select “OK” and then “Save”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

554

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ To display the “Message settings” screen in a different way
1

Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)

Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.

Select “Options” on the “Messages” screen.

■ Editing the quick reply messages in a different way
1

Display the desired message on “Message” screen. (P. 532)

Select “Reply” on the desired message screen.

Select “Edit” on the “Quick Reply Messages”.

Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message.

When you complete editing, select “OK” and then
Message” screen.

on the “Edit Quick Reply

■ Adaptive volume control

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume.
■ To return to the default message settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

555

Phone display settings
Depending on the phone, this function may not be available even if the
phone is PBAP compatible.
Vehicles without a navigation
system

Changing the incoming call display mode

Changing the display phonebook transfer status on/off*

Changing the display call history transfer status on/off*

Changing the contact image during incoming call on/off*

Changing the rotate contact image*



Vehicles with a navigation system

*: For PBAP compatible models
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
1

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.

Select “Phone Display Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features



556
■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing the incoming call display mode

You can select the method of the incoming call display.
1

Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (P. 555)

Select “Incoming Call Display Mode” on the “Phone Display Settings” screen.



Vehicles without a navigation system

Select “Full Screen” or “Drop
Down”, and select “Save”.
“Full Screen”: The hands-free
screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the
system from that screen.
“Drop Down”: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and
you can only operate the system
with the steering switches.



Vehicles with a navigation system

Select “Main Screen” or “Side
Screen”, and select “Save”.
“Main Screen”: The hands-free
screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the
system from that screen.
“Side Screen”: A message is displayed at the side screen, and you
can only operate the system with
the steering switches.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

557

Changing the rotating contact images
For PBAP compatible models, when “Contact Image for Incoming
Calls” is set to “On”, images stored together with phone numbers in the
cellular phone’s phonebook will be transferred and displayed during
the incoming call. The orientation of the image can be set.
1

Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (P. 555)

Select “Rotate Contact Images” on the “Phone Display Settings”
screen.

Choose the desired orientation of the image to be displayed, and
then “Save”.

■ To return to the default detailed phone settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

558

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Setting the Bluetooth®
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.
1

Registered Devices

Connect Phone

Connect Portable Player

Detailed Bluetooth® settings

To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

559

Registered devices
■

Registering a Bluetooth® devices
Bluetooth® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and portable players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Select “Add New” to register a
Bluetooth® device to the system.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have
already been registered, a registered device needs to be deleted.
Select “Yes” to delete one or more.
Select the device to be deleted,
then select “Remove”, and then
“Yes”.

560

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
4

Input the passcode displayed
on the screen into the
Bluetooth® device.
A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, a message confirming registration may
be displayed on the Bluetooth®
phone’s screen. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® phone according to the confirmation message.
For the operation of the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with it.
If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.
If a completion message is displayed, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

561

Removing a Bluetooth® device
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Select “Remove” on the “Registered Devices” screen.

Choose the desired device.
You can select multiple device and
delete them at the same time.
To remove all devices, select
“Select All”.

Select “Remove”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■

Editing a Bluetooth® device

● Changing a device name
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Select “Details”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

You can see the information of the Bluetooth® device on the system or
edit.

562

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
4

Select the device to be edited.

Select “Device Name”.

Input the device name, and
select “OK”.

Confirm the device name and select “OK”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

563

● Setting portable player connection method
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Select “Details” on the “Registered Devices” screen.

Select the device to be edited.

Select “Connect
Player from”.

Select the desired connection
method, and select “OK”.

Portable

“Portable Player”: Select to connect the portable player to the
audio system.
Depending on the portable player,
the “Vehicle” or “Portable Player”
connection method may be best.
As such, refer to the manual that
comes with the portable player.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the
audio system to the portable player.

564

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ Editing the “Device Name”

If you change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not
changed.
■ About “Device Address”

The address peculiar to the system. It cannot be changed. If you have registered two
Bluetooth® phones with the same device name and you cannot distinguish one from
the other, refer to this address.
■ “My Phone Number”:

The phone number of the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on the screen. Depending
on the type of phone, the phone number may not be displayed.
■ “Profiles”:

The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device is displayed on the screen.
■ “Connect Portable Player from”:

There are 2 portable player connection settings available; “Vehicle” and “Portable
Player”.
■ When you delete a Bluetooth® phone

The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

565

Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure below
to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You can only use one phone at
a time.
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Choose the phone to be connected.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the phone.
If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

phone

● When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be

displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

● The currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button will have a Bluetooth®

mark displayed on it. If the currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button
is selected, the Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.

■ Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing

Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ When another Bluetooth® device is connected during registering or selecting a

566

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Selecting a portable player
If multiple portable players are registered, follow the procedure below to
select the portable player phone to be used. You can only use one portable player at a time.
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

Choose the portable player to
be used.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the portable
player.
If a completion message is displayed, connection is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■ When another Bluetooth® device is connected during registering or selecting a

portable player

● When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be

displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

● The currently connected portable player’s screen button will have a Bluetooth®

mark displayed on it. If the currently connected portable player’s screen button is
selected, the portable player can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

567

Detailed Bluetooth settings
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.


Page 1



Page 2

Changing the device connection status

Changing the name of the connected device.

Changing the passcode that you registered your Bluetooth® device in
the system

The address peculiar to the system

The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device

To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
1

Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)

Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

You cannot change this address. If the same device name is displayed on the
screen of your device, refer to it.

568
■

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

Changing Bluetooth* power
The Bluetooth* device is automatically connected when you turn the
power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode. You can change
between “On” or “Off”.
1

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)

Select “Bluetooth* Power” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”
screen.

Select “On” or “Off”, and then
“Save”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■

Editing the device name
1

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)

Select “Device Name” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

Input the device name, and select “OK”.

Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■

569

Editing the passcode
1

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)

Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

Input a passcode, and select
“OK”.

Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■

Bluetooth® device connection status display settings

Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)

Select “Display Phone Status” or “Display Portable Player Status” on
the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

Select “On”, and then “Save”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” and the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the Bluetooth® phone and portable player’s connection status can be displayed.
(P. 568)

570

5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)

■ While driving

You cannot change the state of “Bluetooth* Power” from “On” to “Off” while driving,
but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.
■ To return to the default Bluetooth® settings

Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth® connection will begin.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-5. Using the interior lights

571

Interior lights list

Outer foot lights

Rear personal lights (P. 572)

Shift lever light

Ornament lights

Interior light

Door courtesy lights

Front personal lights

Power window switch lights

Footwell lights

(P. 572)
(P. 572)

5 Inside door handle lights

When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail
lights are on, the inside door handle lights, the ornament lights and the footwell
lights will turn off. (P. 91)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

572

5-5. Using the interior lights

Interior light
1

Turns the light on/off
The rear personal lights are also
turned on/off by the interior light
operation. However, if the interior light
is turned off after being turned on
while the rear personal lights are
turned on, the rear personal lights will
not turn off simultaneously.

Turns the door position on

Personal lights
■

Front
Turns the light on/off

■

Rear
Turns the light on/off
If the lights are turned on by interior
light operation, the lights cannot
turn off by pressing the switch.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-5. Using the interior lights

573

■ Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence
of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors
are opened/closed.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization

Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

574

5-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Cup holders

(P. 578)

Auxiliary boxes

(P. 580)

Glove box

(P. 576)

Console box

(P. 577)

Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
(P. 580)
Ashtrays (if equipped)
(P. 585)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-6. Using the storage features

575

CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with

other stored items.

● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored

items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.

■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use

Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to
an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

576

5-6. Using the storage features

Glove box
1

Open (press the button)

Unlock with the mechanical key

Lock with the mechanical key

■ Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■ Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 142)
■ Removing the insert

The insert inside the glove box can be removed.
■ The glove box door

An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box door.
(P. 38)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-6. Using the storage features

577

Console box
1

Using with half-open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and slide the armrest as far back.

Using with fully open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open.

■ Tray in the console box

The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.

The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

CAUTION
When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the
armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ Console box light

578

5-6. Using the storage features

Cup holders
■

Front
To open, press down and release
the cup holder lid.

■

Rear
To open, pull down the armrest
and press in and release the rear
cup holder on the armrest.

■ Removing the separate tray (front cup holder)

The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.

■ When stowing the cup holders (rear cup holder)

Stow the cup holder with the armrest down. The cup holder cannot be stowed if the
armrest is not down.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-6. Using the storage features

579

CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder

Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

580

5-6. Using the storage features

Auxiliary boxes


Type A

Press in the button.



Type C (if equipped)

Open the lid.

CAUTION
■ Using the auxiliary boxes (type C)

Do not use the auxiliary box as an ashtray.
Doing so may cause a fire.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)



Type B

Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the lid.

5-6. Using the storage features

581

Trunk features
Cargo hooks
Raise the hooks when needed.
The cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.

Luggage hook
Pull the strap when using the hook.
5

Interior features

First-aid kit storage net

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

582

5-6. Using the storage features

Luggage mat
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
luggage mat.

Warning reflector storage belt
1

Loosen the belt

Tighten the belt

CAUTION
■ When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.

NOTICE
■ Luggage hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the luggage hook.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

583

Sun visors and vanity mirrors
Sun visors
1

To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing
it to the side.

To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position, then
slide it backward.

Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The light turns on when the cover is
opened.

584

5-7. Other interior features

Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
1

Pressing and holding will move
the clock hands backward.

Pressing and holding will move
the clock hands forward.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

585

5-7. Other interior features

Ashtrays
Open the ashtray lid.
To remove the ashtray, pull the ashtray
lid upwards.

CAUTION
■ When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an
accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash
flying out.
■ To prevent fire

make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then

586

5-7. Other interior features

Power outlets
The power outlets can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
120 V AC (if equipped): Accessories that use less than 100 W.

12 V
■

Front
Open the lid.

■

Rear (if equipped)
Open the lid.

120 V AC (if equipped for rear only)
Open the lid.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

587

■ The power outlets can be used when

12 V: The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
120 V AC: The power switch is in ON mode.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown

12 V:
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 V AC:
Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100W. If a 120 V AC
appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut
the power supply.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)

588

5-7. Other interior features

Heated steering wheel
The heated steering wheel heats the side grips of the steering wheel.
Turns the heater on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heater is operating.

■ Operating condition

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Timer

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■ If the indicator light flashes

Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

589

CAUTION
■ Burns

Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes
in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold

remedies, etc.)

NOTICE
■ To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged

Turn the switch off when the hybrid system is off.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

590

5-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters/seat ventilators
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.

Seat heaters
■

Front seats
Turns the seat heater on
1

Mid

Off
The indicator light (yellow) on the
switch and the level indicator lights
(green) come on.

■

Rear seats (if equipped)
Turns the seat heater on
1

Mid

Off
The level indicator lights (yellow)
come on.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

591

Seat ventilators (front seats only)
Blows air from the seat
1

Mid

Off
The indicator light (green) on the
switch and the level indicator lights
(green) come on.

■ The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ The seat heater timer control

The seat heater automatically switches from Hi Mid  Lo Off. The switching
timing differs depending on the temperature inside the cabin etc. when the seat
heater was operated.
Eco drive mode controls the heating operations and fan speed of the air conditioning
system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco
drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater may be automatically operated to
assist heating performance.
■ Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■ Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode

592

5-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on

to avoid the possibility of burns:
•
•
•
•

Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
Persons with sensitive skin
Persons who are fatigued
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
● Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or

overheating.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the hybrid system is off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

593

Armrest
Fold down the armrest for use.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not apply too much load on the armrest.
5

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

594

5-7. Other interior features

Rear sunshade/rear door sunshades
Rear sunshade
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button
shown below.
■

■

From the front seats
1

Pull up the lever to release the
lock.

Slide the armrest.

Raise/lower

From the rear seats (if equipped)
Raise/lower

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

595

Rear door sunshades
Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade and hook the shade on using
the anchors.
To retract the rear door sunshade,
unhook the shade and retract it slowly.

■ The rear sunshade can be used when

The power switch is in ON mode.
■ Operating the rear sunshade after the hybrid system is turned off

The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
■ Reverse operation feature

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● The button is pressed again.*
● Shift the shift lever into P.
● The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h).
If the hybrid system is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is
turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the
sunshade again, press the button.

*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has
been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift lever is shifted to R.

596

5-7. Other interior features

■ Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)

To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■ Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)
■ Customization

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)

CAUTION
■ When the rear sunshade is being operated

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge

Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.
■ To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades

Observe the following precautions.
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sun-

shade.

● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

597

Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with
the rear assist grips.

CAUTION
■ Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death
or serious injury.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

598

5-7. Other interior features

Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.

CAUTION
■ Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.

NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

599

Utility hook
To use the utility hook, push it on.

CAUTION
■ When not in use

Keep the utility hook stowed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
5

NOTICE
Do not hang any object heavier than 4.4 lb. (2 kg) on the utility hook.
The utility hook may get damaged or the object hooked on the utility hook may fall
down while driving.

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■ Utility hook weight capacity

600

5-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems,
and other devices.
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufactured under license from HomeLink®.

Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
1

Indicator light

Buttons

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features
■

601

Programming HomeLink®
1

Point the remote control transmitter for the device 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.

Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both buttons.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

If the HomeLink® indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink® button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Reprogramming a HomeLink® button”
instructions. (P. 604)

602

5-7. Other interior features
3

Test the HomeLink® operation
by pressing the newly programmed button.
If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
garage transmitter is of the rolling
code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type if the HomeLink®
indicator light flashes rapidly for
2 seconds and then remains lit. If
your transmitter is the rolling code
type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

4
■

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.

Programming a rolling code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the steps
listed below.
1

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary
by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the
location of the training button.

Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 below.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features
3

603

Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door
does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and
release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the
HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.

4
■

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for
any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.

Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a
devices in the Canadian market
1

Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away
from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.

2 Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control transmitter
for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.

When the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly, release
the buttons.

Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed
button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.

Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks and lighting, contact your Lexus dealer for assistance.

■

Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink® button” instructions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

■

604

5-7. Other interior features

Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light
should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink® button and press and hold the transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Release
the buttons.

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons
for 10 seconds until the indicator
light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

605

■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
● The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the

HomeLink® button.

■ Certification for the garage door opener
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

■ When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

606

5-7. Other interior features

CAUTION
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■ Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

607

Safety Connect
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by
the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy
of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
5

System components
“SOS” button

LED light indicators

Microphone

Interior features

: If equipped

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

608

5-7. Other interior features

Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
● Automatic Collision Notification*

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service
providers. (P. 610)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
● Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 611)
● Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 611)
● Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 611)

Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement
and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your
Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

609

■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during

Safety Connect.

● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact

with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by
subscription term selected.

● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Loca-

tion will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada,
and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except
Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the
United States in countries other than Canada.

● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications

Act and the device is not TTY compatible.

■ Languages

■ When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.

610

5-7. Other interior features

Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light
comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
● Green indicator light on = Active service
● Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
● Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction

(contact your Lexus dealer)
● No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

Safety Connect services
■

Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the
call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to
the location.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features
■

611

Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain
circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.

■

Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.

■

Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included
warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect
Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Interior features

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that
you are not experiencing an emergency.

612

5-7. Other interior features

Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■

Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
● ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
● NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-

ment) Report 86 [1986]
● ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-

tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI
Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

5-7. Other interior features

613

■ Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

614

5-7. Other interior features

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

615

Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 616
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ..................620
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements ...623
General maintenance .............. 626
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs ................................... 630

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................. 631
Hood ...............................................634
Positioning a floor jack.............635
Engine compartment ............... 637
12-volt battery.............................. 647
Tires................................................... 651
Tire inflation pressure .................661
Wheels ...........................................664
Air conditioning filter ...............666
Electronic key battery..............668
Checking and replacing
fuses.............................................. 670
Headlight aim ..............................685
Light bulbs..................................... 687

616

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body,

wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly

with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is
cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the

vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm

your vehicle’s paint.

■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the win-

dows.

● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

■ When using a car wash

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the

vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system

with push-button start. (P. 127)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

617

■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard

brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for

long distance in the hot weather.

● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)
● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-

ing.

• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can
be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
6

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

618

6-1. Maintenance and care

CAUTION
■ When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause
the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield

Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield
wipers. (P. 221)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught
or other serious injuries and cause damage
to the wiper blades.
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the

raindrop sensor

■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled
sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

619

NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-

minum wheels etc.)

● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

•
•
•
•

After driving near the sea coast
After driving on salted roads
If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint
surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with

low humidity when storing the wheels.

■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■ When using an automatic car wash

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (P. 221)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.

620

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a
cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all

remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining mois-

ture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or

soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and

wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

621

■ Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
■ Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.

If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet
could be damaged.

CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid bat-

tery (traction battery) air vents, and in the trunk.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

(P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

622

6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-

rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park

the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as

they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■ Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping

Assist])

Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (P. 251).
If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LKA may not operate properly or
may cause a malfunction.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to

the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

623

Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following maintenance:

General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be
done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and
Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

Do-it-yourself maintenance

The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty
Booklet”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

624

6-2. Maintenance

■ Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop
other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedure described below:
1

Switch the display to the trip meter “A” (P. 91) when the hybrid system is operating.

Turn the power switch off.

While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (P. 91), turn the power switch to the
ON mode (do not start the hybrid system because otherwise the reset mode will
be canceled).
The message shown in the illustration will
appear on the display.
Continue to press and hold the button until
the trip meter displays “000000”.

■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest

service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on
your vehicle.

● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per-

formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle
is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-2. Maintenance

625

CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the 12-volt battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-

ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.

● 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead

compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 647)

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

626

6-2. Maintenance

General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer
or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment
Items

Check points

Brake fluid

Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(P. 645)

Engine/power control unit coolant

Is the engine/power control unit coolant
at the correct level?
(P. 642)

Engine oil

Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(P. 639)

Exhaust system

There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.

Radiator/condenser

The radiator and condenser should be
free from foreign objects. (P. 644)

Washer fluid

Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 646)

Luggage compartment
Items
12-volt battery

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Check points
Check the connections.

(P. 647)

6-2. Maintenance

627

Vehicle interior
Items

Check points
• The accelerator pedal should move
smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching).

Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism

• When parked on a slope and the shift
lever is in P, is the vehicle securely
stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
(P. 789)
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?
(P. 789)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too
close to the floor when the brakes are
applied.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Accelerator pedal

628

6-2. Maintenance

Items

Check points

Head restraints

• Do the head restraints
smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers

• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights

• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 685)

Parking brake

• Moves smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?

Seat belts

• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

move

6-2. Maintenance

629

Vehicle exterior
Items

Check points

Doors/trunk

• Do the
smoothly?

doors/trunk

operate

Engine hood

• Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?

Fluid leaks

• There should not be any signs of fluid
leakage after the vehicle has been
parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

CAUTION
■ If the hybrid system is operating

Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

630

6-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the
operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may
need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
● When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be
completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is
driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

631

Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items

Parts and tools
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)

(P. 645)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)

Engine/power control unit
coolant level
(P. 642)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
a similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non-silicate, non-amine, nonnitrite and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Engine oil level

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine
oil)

Brake fluid level

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

(P. 639)

Maintenance and care

(P. 647)

12-volt battery condition

632

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Items

Parts and tools

Fuses

(P. 670)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

Headlight aim

(P. 685)

• Phillips-head screwdriver

Light bulbs

(P. 687)

• Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench

Radiator and condenser

(P. 644)

Tire inflation pressure

(P. 661)

• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source

(P. 646)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or
washer fluid)

Washer fluid

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)



6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

633

CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious
injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information display and the

“READY” indicator are both off.

● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold,

etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine

compartment.

● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flam-

mable.

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the power switch is off.
With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P. 644)
■ Safety glasses

NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

634

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1

Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.

Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.

CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

635

Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

◆ Front

◆ Rear

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

636

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury:
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as

the one shown in the illustration.

● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the

jack.

● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported

only by the floor jack.

● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
● Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the

shift lever to P.

● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the

floor jack.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

637

Engine compartment

1
2

Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 642)

Fuse box

Washer fluid tank (P. 646)

Electric cooling fans

Engine oil filler cap
(P. 640)

Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 645)

9 Condenser
Power
control
unit
coolant
res4
10 Radiator
ervoir
(P. 642)
■ 12-volt battery

P. 647

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

(P. 670)

(P. 644)
(P. 644)

Maintenance and care

Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 639)

638

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment cover
■

■

Removing the engine compartment cover


Right-hand side



Center

Installing the clips
1

Push up center portion

Insert

Press

NOTICE
■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

639

Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■

Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and
turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.

Low

Full

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

640
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as that already in
the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Engine oil selection

P. 785

Oil quantity
(Low  Full)

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Items

Clean funnel

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■ Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after

replacing the engine

● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while

accelerating or decelerating frequently

● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through

heavy traffic

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

641

CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin

disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.

● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-

pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

642

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
■

Engine coolant reservoir
1

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 774)

■

Power control unit coolant reservoir
1

Reservoir cap

“FULL” line

“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 774)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

643

■ Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.

CAUTION
■ When the hybrid system is hot

NOTICE
■ When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps or the radiator cap.(P. 777)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

644

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the hybrid system is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

645

Brake fluid
■

Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.

■

Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items

Clean funnel

■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.

■ When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out
or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

CAUTION

646

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.

CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

647

12-volt battery
Location
The 12-volt battery is located on the
left-hand side of luggage compartment.

Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
12-volt battery cover.

Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
1

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Exterior

648

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Before recharging

When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
● If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-

necting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
● The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-

tem.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Open and close any of the doors.

Restart the hybrid system.

● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not

be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

● Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid

system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system
will operate normally from the second attempt.

● The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-

nected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before
the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch
before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt
battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact
your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

649

CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12volt battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
● Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■ Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery

Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the 12-volt battery

Observe the following precautions when recharging the 12-volt battery. Failure to
do so may damage the 12-volt battery and cause death or serious injury.
● Slow charge: Recharge at a current of 5 A or less and make sure that the

● Quick charge: Recharge at a current of 15 A or less and make sure that the

Maintenance and care

recharging period does not exceed a total of 12 hours.
recharging period does not exceed 60 minutes.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

650

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.

● If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

● If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.

● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas
(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE
■ When recharging the 12-volt battery

Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

651

Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.

Checking tires
1

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

652

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire
life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval
as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Front

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

653

Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.


Vehicles without the tire inflation pressure display function

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a warning light. (P. 715)


Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function

● If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is

warned by a screen display and a warning light. (P. 740)
● The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be

displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 97)

◆ Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

◆ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■

The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
● When rotating the tires.
● When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing

traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer
and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus
dealer. (P. 655)

654
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1

Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 790)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure
level.

Turn the power switch to ON mode.

Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until
the tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly 3 times.

Wait for a few minutes with the power switch in ON mode and then
turn the power switch off.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

655

◆ Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Lexus dealer.
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,

and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or loca-

tion of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the
tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life

■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■ When rotating the tires (vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function)

Make sure that the power switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the power switch
is in ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the power switch to off and then to ON mode,
or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

656

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed
appropriate for road and weather conditions.
■ Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 795)

■ Tire types
● Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or
icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is
recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season
tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity
as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow
tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 319)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

657

■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
Tire chains etc. are equipped.
Lock nuts are equipped.
An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function: If tire position information
is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be
corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.

● When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could
● When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the

warning may not function.

■ The initialization operation
● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation
pressure adjustment.

● If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not

necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically
when the power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.

● If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust

the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct
initialization again.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

be extended.

658

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the
settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning

light does not blink 3 times.

● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks

for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.

■ Tire pressure warning system certification

MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMVC010
Initiator: HYQ22AAA
 For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 For vehicles sold in Canada

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

659

CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices (vehicles with the tire

inflation pressure display function)

diac defibrillators should not come within
17.7 in. (450 mm) of the tire pressure warning system initiators. The radio waves may
affect the operation of such devices.

● Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

● People with implanted pacemakers or car-

660

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters

and tire valve caps

● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed,

water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning
valves could be bound.

● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-

fied. The cap may become stuck.

■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 653)
■ Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may

be damaged more severely.

● Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so

may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

661

Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading
information label. (P. 790)

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

662

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Inspection and adjustment procedure
1

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the
pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

■ Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

663

■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

● Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that
is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.

● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pres-

sure to be higher after driving.

● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling

● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as
possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

● Poor sealing of the tire bead

664

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your

aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel

nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
● Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or

rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

665

■ When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 653)

CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

666

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.

Removal method
1

Turn the power switch off.

Open the glove box. Lift up the
side with the stay, disconnect the
stay tabs and remove the partition by pulling horizontally.

Press the tabs and remove the filter cover.

Press the tabs and remove the filter case.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5

667

Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing
up.

■ Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

668

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver
● Small flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2032

Replacing the battery
1

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

669

■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops

or camera stores.

● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will

not function properly.

● The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they
can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
● Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

670

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1

Turn the power switch off.

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for
details about which fuse to check. (P. 674)

Open the fuse box cover.



Engine compartment
Remove the engine compartment cover (P. 638) and
remove all of the clips.

Push the tabs on either side to
detach the lock and lift the lid off
while pulling the lock plate.
When installing the lid, check that
the lock plate and the tabs on either
side are connected correctly.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance


671

Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.



Passenger’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.



Trunk
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.

Maintenance and care

Remove the lid.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

672


6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

The upper part of the 12-volt battery
Pull the strap upwards to lift up
the 12-volt battery cover.

Remove the fuse with the pullout
tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed
using the pullout tool.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
5

673

Check if the fuse is blown.
1

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.


Type A



Type B



Type C



Type D

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

674

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■

Engine compartment

Fuse
1

IGN

Ampere

Circuit

Starting system

2 INJ

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system

3 EFI NO.2

Air intake system, exhaust system

4 IG2 MAIN

IGN, GAUGE, INJ, AIR BAG, IG2 NO.1,
LH-IG2

5 EFI MAIN

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2

6 A/F

Air flow sensor

7 EDU

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system

8 F/PMP

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system

9 H-LP RH-LO

Right-hand headlight (low beam)*

10 H-LP LH-LO

Left-hand headlight (low beam)*

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

675

Circuit

Brake system

12 ABS MAIN 1

Brake system

13 IGCT NO.1

IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3, IGCT NO.4,
IGCT NO.5

14 ECU-B

7.5

Smart access system with push-button start

15 INV W/P

Hybrid system

16 ETCS

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system

17 EPS-B

Electric power steering system

18 D/C CUT

DOME, MPX-B

19 HORN

Horn

20 ODS

Occupant classification system

21 TV

7.5

Remote Touch screen

22 P/I-B NO.2

IG2 MAIN, EFI MAIN, EDU, F/PMP, A/F

23 ABS NO.2

ECB

24 P/I-B NO.1

H-LP HI RH, H-LP HI LH, DRL

25 H-LP LO

H-LP LO RH, H-LP LO LH

26 LH J/B-B

Left-hand junction block

27 RH J/B-B

Right-hand junction block

28 VGRS

No circuit

29 OIL PMP

Oil pump

30 IGCT NO.5

7.5

Power management system, shift position
sensor

31 WIP-S

7.5

Windshield wipers, driver support system

32 WASH-S

Windshield washer, driver support system

33 COMB SW

Windshield wipers

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

11 ABS MAIN 2

676

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

Circuit

7.5

Personal lights, ornament lights, trunk light,
footwell lights, door courtesy lights, vanity
lights, rear door inside handle illuminations,
power trunk opener and closer

35 MPX-B

Body ECU, smart access system with pushbutton start, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, head-up display,
front door ECU, gauges and meters, steering sensor, yaw rate and G sensor, overhead
module, RR CTRL SW, power trunk opener
and closer, clock, CAN gateway ECU

36 IGCT NO.4

Power control unit

37 IGCT NO.3

7.5

Hybrid battery (traction battery), DC/DC
converter

38 IGCT NO.2

Hybrid system

39 IG2 NO.1

DCM, CAN gateway ECU

40 GAUGE

Gauges and meters

41 DC/DC

150

RH-J/B DC/DC, P/I DC/DC

42 P/I DC/DC

100

RR S/SHADE, DEFOG, FOG, TAIL,
PANEL

43 RH J/B DC/DC

Right-hand junction block

44 LH J/B DC/DC

Left-hand junction block

45 H-LP CLN

Headlight cleaner

46 FAN NO.2

Electric cooling fans

47 LUG J/B DC/DC

Luggage compartment junction block

48 FAN NO.1

Electric cooling fans

49 PTC NO.1

PTC heater

50 PTC NO.2

PTC heater

51 HTR

Air conditioning system

34 DOME

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

677

Circuit

52 ABS NO.1

ECB

53 ECU-B NO.2

7.5

No circuit

54 DEICER

Windshield wiper de-icer

55 ABS MAIN 3

Brake system

56 FILTER

Condenser

57 A/C W/P

7.5

Air conditioning system

58 SPARE

Spare fuse

59 SPARE

Spare fuse

60 SPARE

Spare fuse

*: Low beam and high beam are the same bulb. (vehicles with discharge headlights)

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

678
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Driver’s side instrument panel

Fuse
1

STOP

Ampere

Circuit

7.5

Stop lights, high mounted stoplight

2 P/W-B

Power window master switch

3 P/SEAT1 F/L

Power seats

4 D/L NO.1

Power door lock system

5 NV-IR

Lexus night view

6 FL S/HTR

Seat heaters/ventilators

7 WIPER

Windshield wipers

8 WIPER-IG

Windshield wipers

Seat belts, body ECU, AFS, overhead module, raindrop sensor, inside rear view mirror,
lane camera sensor (LKA), head-up display,
shift lock system, intuitive parking assist, front
left-hand door ECU, driver monitor system,
Remote Touch screen, electric tilt and telescopic steering column, power seats, moon
roof, windshield wiper de-icer, intuitive parking assist switch, PTC heater, headlight
cleaner

VDIM, ECB, D-SW MODULE (Blind Spot
Monitor, heated steering wheel), driver support system, AFS, EPB, air conditioning system

9 LH-IG

10 LH ECU-IG

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

679

Ampere

Circuit

Outside rear view mirror defoggers, power
window (front left-hand)

CAPACITOR
(HV)

Capacitor

13 STRG LOCK

Steering lock system

14 D/L NO.2

Power door lock system

15 DOOR RL

Power window (rear left-hand)

16 HAZ

Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

17 LH-IG2

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, stop lights,
smart access system with push-button start,
steering lock system, brake system, power
management system

18 LH J/B-B

7.5

Body ECU

19 S/ROOF

Moon roof

20 P/SEAT2 F/L

Power seats

21 TI & TE

Electric tilt and telescopic steering column

22 A/C

7.5

Air conditioning system

11 DOOR FL
12

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

680
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Fuse
1

P/SEAT1 F/R

Ampere

Circuit

Power seats

2 FR P/OUTLET

Power outlet (front)

3 RR P/OUTLET

Power outlet (rear)

4 P/SEAT2 F/R

Power seats

5 AVS

AVS

6 STRG HTR

Heated steering wheel

7 WASH

Windshield washer

8 RH ECU-IG

Navigation system, pre-collision seat belts,
air conditioning system, ECB, Lexus night
view, yaw rate and G sensor

9 RH-IG

Tension reducer, seat heater/ventilator
switches, front right-hand door ECU, CAN
gateway ECU, tire pressure warning system,
power seats

10 DOOR FR

Front right-hand door control system (outside rear view mirror defoggers, power window)

11 DOOR RR

Power window (rear right-hand)

12 RAD NO.2

Audio system

13 AM2

7.5

Power management system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

Ampere

681

Circuit

14 MULTIMEDIA

Navigation system, Remote Touch

15 RAD NO.1

Audio system

16 AIR BAG

SRS airbag system, occupant classification
system

17 OBD

7.5

On-board diagnosis system

18 ACC

7.5

Body ECU, head-up display, RR CTRL, navigation system, hybrid transmission, Remote
Touch, DCM, Remote Touch screen, clock

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

682
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Trunk

Fuse
1

Ampere

Circuit

PSB

Pre-collision seat belts

2 PTL

Power trunk opener and closer

3 RR J/B-B

Smart access system with push-button start

4 RR S/HTR

Seat heaters (rear)

5 FR S/HTR

Seat heaters/ventilators (front)

6 RR FOG

No circuit

7 DC/DC-S (HV)

7.5

DC/DC converter

8 BATT FAN (HV)

Hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling fan
system

9 SECURITY

7.5

SECURITY

10 ECU-B NO.3

7.5

Parking brake

11 TRK OPN

7.5

Power trunk opener and closer

12 DCM (HV)

7.5

DCM

13 AC INV (HV)

Power outlet (120V AC)

14 RR-IG1

Radar sensor, Blind Spot Monitor

15 RR ECU-IG

Power trunk opener and closer, parking
brake, tension reducer (rear left-hand), RR
CTRL SW, tire pressure warning system

16 EPS-IG

Electric power steering system

17 BACK UP

7.5

Back-up lights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■

683

The upper part of the 12-volt battery*

Fuse
1

EPB

Ampere

Circuit

Parking brake

2 LUG-J/B BATT

Luggage compartment junction block

3 EPS

Electric power steering

4 ARS

No circuit

5 MAIN

220

Engine compartment junction block

*: When one or more of the fuses in this unit are blown, the unit needs to be
replaced as a whole.
6

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

684

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need

replacement. (P. 687)

● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■ When replacing light bulbs

Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, nongenuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.

CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

685

Headlight aim
Vertical movement adjusting bolts


Discharge headlights

Adjustment bolt A

Adjustment bolt B



LED headlights

Before checking the headlight aim
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Sit in the driver’s seat.

Bounce the vehicle several times.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

686

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Adjusting the headlight aim
1

Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn bolt A in either direction.
Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.



Discharge headlights

Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step
1 .



LED headlights

If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.


Discharge headlights

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)



LED headlights

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

687

Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Lexus dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 791)

Removing the engine compartment covers
P. 638

Bulb locations
■

Front



Vehicles with discharge headlights

Maintenance and care

Front turn signal light

Fog light (if equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

688


■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Vehicles with LED headlights

Fog light (if equipped)

Front turn signal light

Rear

Back-up light

Rear turn signal light

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

689

Replacing light bulbs
■

Fog lights (if equipped)
1

To allow enough working
space, turn the steering wheel
to the opposite side of the bulb
to be replaced.
Remove the 2 fender liner
clips.
Turn the steering wheel to the left
when replacing the right side light
bulb, and turn the steering wheel to
the right when replacing the left
side light bulb.
To take out the clips, turn the head
of the clip to unlock, then remove
by pulling.

Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

While holding the clamp open,
pull and remove the tabs and
open the fender liner.

690

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert. Turn
it clockwise to set.

Set the connector.
After installing the connector,
shake the bulb base gently to check
that it is not loose, turn the fog lights
on once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.

Reinstall the fender liner and
install the clips.
Insert the clips and turn to lock.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■

691

Front turn signal lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)
1

For the left side only: To allow
enough working space, turn
the steering wheel all the way
to the right, then remove the
bolts and take off the cover.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.



Right side



Left side
6

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

692

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
3

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
After installing the bulb base,
secure the cord with the clips and
install the cover* in its original position.

*: For the left side only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■

693

Front turn signal lights (vehicles with LED headlights)
1

For the left side only: Remove
the bolt and move the washer
fluid filler opening.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.
6

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

694

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4

When installing, reverse the steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and if replacing the
left side bulb, make sure to install the bolt for the washer fluid filler opening in
its original position.



Right side

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)



Left side

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■

695

Rear turn signal lights
1

Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.
6

When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
After installing the bulb base,
secure the cord with the clips and
install the cover in its original position.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

696
■

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Back-up lights
1

Open the trunk lid.

For the left side (vehicles with
power trunk opener and closer
only): Pry out each side of the
trunk closer switch in turn by
inserting a screwdriver into the
base.
To prevent damage, cover the tip of
the screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the clips on whichever
side you are replacing and
open the cover of the trunk lid.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■

697

Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
● Headlights
● Parking lights and daytime running lights
● Front side marker lights
● Side turn signal lights
● Stop/tail lights
● Tail lights
● Rear side marker lights
● High mounted stoplight
● License plate lights
● Outer foot lights

■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go
out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
The lights other than the discharge headlights (if equipped), fog lights (if equipped),
front turn signal lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and outer foot lights each
consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ When replacing light bulbs

P. 684

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Maintenance and care

■ LED Lights

698

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning

off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by

the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may

result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

● Vehicles with discharge headlights: While

the headlights are turned on, and for a short
time after they have been turned off, metal
components at the rear of the headlight
assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent
burns, do not touch these metal components until you are certain they have cooled
down.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Metal components

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

699

CAUTION
■ Discharge headlights (if equipped)
● Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including

light bulbs).

● Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights

are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in
death or serious injury by electric shock.

● Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power

supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.

■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

Maintenance and care

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

700

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

701

When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...................702
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency ....703

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................ 704
If you think
something is wrong................. 710
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds........ 711
If a warning message
is displayed ..................................721
If you have a flat tire....................749
If the hybrid system
will not start.................................762
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P ......................764
If the parking brake cannot
be released .................................765
If the electronic key does not
operate properly ...................... 767
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged............................. 770
If your vehicle overheats .......... 774
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................................. 778

702

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signals will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.

■ Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not
operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may
discharge.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-1. Essential information

703

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
1

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.



If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the hybrid system.



If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.

To stop the hybrid system, press
and hold the power switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more, or
press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION

■ If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the hybrid system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more

704

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
● The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be
attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at under 18 mph
(30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles,
steering and brakes must be in good
condition.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

705

Installing towing eyelet
1

Take out the towing eyelet (P. 750)

Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

706

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck


From the front



From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the rear Turn the power switch to ACCESwheels.
SORY mode so that the steering
wheel is unlocked.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

707

Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a flat
bed truck, it should be tied down at
the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

708

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Before emergency towing
1

Release the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON (hybrid system
operating) mode.

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

● If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not

function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

709

NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a

wheel-lift type truck

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the power switch off. The steering lock

mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

● When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for

towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.

■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

710

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher

than normal.

Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system

Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the

floor

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

711

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes
on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this
continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may
be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Warning light

(U.S.A.)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system

(Canada)

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

712

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning light

Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic hybrid transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system

(Canada)
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

713

Warning light/Details

Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system
is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 296)
(Flashes)
•
The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is dis(If equipped)
abled. (P. 297)
• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be
used. (P. 735)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system; or
• The TRAC system
The light will flash when the VSC or the TRC system is operating.

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

(Flashes)

Brake hold operated indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
7

Parking brake indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

(Flashes)
(Canada)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)

“AFS OFF” indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting system

714

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronically controlled brake system;
• The regenerative braking system; or
• The parking brake system

Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light goes off.
Warning light

Warning light/Details

Correction procedure

Open door warning light
Check that all the doors and
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the the trunk are closed.
trunk is not fully closed
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
Refuel the vehicle.
approximately 2.6 gal. (10.0
L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less
Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2
Warns the driver and/or front
passenger to fasten their seat
belts

Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is
occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to
be fastened to make the
warning light (warning
buzzer) off.

Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
P. 721
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

Warning light/Details

715

Correction procedure

Tire pressure warning light
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
to the specified level.
When the light comes on:
The light will turn off after a
Low tire inflation pressure such
few minutes. In case the light
as
does not turn off even if the
• Natural causes (P. 717)
tire inflation pressure is
• Flat tire (P. 749)
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
Have the system checked by
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure your Lexus dealer.
warning system

*1: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 728

*2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his
or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds,
the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still
unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is
not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds
for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

716

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors,
side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors
(rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger
occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 40)
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the seat.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

● Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient of the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

717

■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though
the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

P. 657
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when
the power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

718

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may
fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-

sure immediately.

● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-

ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change
it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.

● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could

lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

719

CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

720

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire

When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread patterns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

721

If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
1

Master warning light
The master warning light also comes
on or flashes in order to indicate that a
message is currently being displayed
on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have
been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

(U.S.A.)
(Canada)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Details

Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or,
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
A buzzer also sounds.

When trouble arises

Warning message

722

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system;
• The electronically controlled brake system; or
• The electric parking brake
A buzzer also sounds.

Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message

Details

Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.

Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

723

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Warning message

(Flashes)

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.

Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise
control system (if equipped) or the cruise control system
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

(If equipped)

724

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist)
(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlight system
(Flashes)
(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system
(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting
system
(If equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

725

Details
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system;
or,
• The seat belt pretensioner system

(U.S.A.)

Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or,
• The brake assist system

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
(Flashes)
7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Depress the brake pedal.

726

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

(Flashes)
(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power
Steering) system

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

727

Details

Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
(Flashes)
(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the smart access system
with push-button start
(Flashes)

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

728

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a Make sure that all the
speed of 3 mph (5 doors are closed.
km/h),
flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet
fully closed.

Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes Close the hood.
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
hood is not yet fully
closed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

729

Correction procedure

Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes Close the trunk.
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
trunk is not yet fully
closed.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the windows are not fully closed
(with the power switch Close all the windows.
off, and the driver’s door
open)

(Flashes)

Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the power switch Close the moon roof.
off, and the driver’s door
open)
7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Indicates that the windows and the moon roof
Close all the windows
are not fully closed (with
and the moon roof.
the power switch off, and
the driver’s door open)

730

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph

Correction procedure

Release
(5 km/h),
brake.
flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is
still engaged.

(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)

the

parking

Indicates that the parking
Wait until the system
brake system has overcools down.
heated

(Flashes)

Indicates that the brake
hold system is not hold Use the brake hold systhe vehicle when the tem when it becomes
vehicle is on a steep available.
incline

Indicates that the brake
hold system is unable to
Depress the brake pedal.
cancel the brake hold
function

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

731

Correction procedure

Indicates that the brake
• Close the driver’s door.
hold system is not avail• Fasten the driver’s seat
able
belt.
The reason the brake
• Close the trunk and
hold system is not availhood.
able may be displayed.

Indicates that the brake
• Depress the brake
hold system is not availpedal.
able
• Close the driver’s door.
The reason the brake
• Fasten the driver’s seat
hold system is not availbelt.
able may be displayed.
7

(Flashes)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

the

parking

When trouble arises

Indicates that the parking
brake is set automatically Release
while the brake hold sys- brake.
tem is holding the brakes

732

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Details

Correction procedure

When stopping the vehicle for a long period of
Indicates that the hybrid
time, shift the shift lever to
battery (traction battery)
P. The battery cannot be
is low
charged with the shift
lever in N.
Indicates that the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
power has dropped
Restart the hybrid system
because a long period of
when starting the vehicle.
time has elapsed after
shifting the shift lever to
N

Indicates that the gasoline engine cannot oper- Stop the vehicle and shift
ate or the shift lever is in the shift lever to P.
N for a long time

Indicates that the accelRelease the accelerator
erator pedal is depressed
pedal and shift the shift
while the shift position is
lever to D or R.
in N

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

733

Correction procedure

Indicates that the EV
drive mode is not available*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not available (the vehicle is
Use the EV drive mode
idling, battery charge is
when it becomes availlow, speed is higher
able.
than the EV drive
mode operating speed
range,
accelerator
pedal is depressed too
much) may be displayed.

Indicates that engine oil Check the level of engine
level is low
oil, and add if necessary.

*: For the EV drive mode operating conditions: P. 196

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Indicates that the EV
drive mode has been
automatically canceled*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not available (the battery
Drive the vehicle for a
charge is low, speed is
while.
higher than the EV
drive mode operating
speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed
too much) may be displayed.

734

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that intuitive
parking assist sensor is Clean the sensor.
dirty or covered with ice

(If equipped)

Indicates that the radar
sensor is dirty or covered Clean the sensor.
with ice
(If equipped)

(If equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

• Turn off the snow
mode.
Indicates that the radar • If the windshield wipcruise control system is
ers are on, turn them
unable to judge vehicleoff or set them to a
to-vehicle distance
mode other than
AUTO or high speed
wiper operation.
Indicates that your vehicle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode)
Slow the vehicle by
applying the brakes.
At the same time,
will appear on the
head-up display (the
image flashes).

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashes)
(If equipped)

(If equipped)

Details

735

Correction procedure

Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a frontal
collision, or that the precollision braking function
is operating
Slow the vehicle by
At the same time, applying the brakes.
will appear
on the head-up display too (the image
flashes).
Indicates that the LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist) is
suspended
• The camera sensor
temperature is higher Restart the LKA after
than the operation tem- driving for a while.
perature range.
• The power steering
system operation is
restricted.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

736

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(If equipped)

Details

Correction procedure

Alerts the driver that the
vehicle is out of the lanes
(while the LKA [LaneKeeping Assist] system is
operating)
The warning buzzer
sounds continuously.
Check around the vehiThe lane markings and/ cle and back to inside of
or the steering wheel the lane markings.
marking flash.
At the same time,
will appear
on the head-up display (part of the image
flashes).

(If equipped)

Indicates that the LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)
system detects nohanded driving (while the Grip the steering wheel
lane keeping assist func- firmly.
tion is operating)
The warning buzzer
sounds twice.

Indicates that the Blind
Spot Monitor sensors or Clean the sensor and its
the surrounding area on surrounding area on the
the bumper is dirty or bumper.
covered with ice
(If equipped)
Indicates that the hybrid
system has overheated
This message may be
displayed when driving Stop and check.
under severe operating (P. 774)
conditions. (For example, when driving up a
long steep hill.)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Details

737

Correction procedure

Indicates that the hybrid
Drive the vehicle at a safe
system output is limited
speed until the warning
because the engine oil is
message disappears.
overheated

Indicates that the vehicle
is unable to drive over 65 Wait until the transmismph (110 km/h) until the sion warms up.
transmission warms up

Indicates that remaining
fuel is approximately 2.6
Refuel the vehicle.
gal. (10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.)
or less

(Flashes)

Indicates that the power
switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY
Turn the lights off.
mode and the driver’s
door is opened while the
lights are turned on
7

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Indicates that the driver’s
door was opened with the
Shift the shift position to P.
shift position in any position other than P

738

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)

In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-tovehicle distance decreases:
● When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the

vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle

● When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
● Immediately after cruise control speed is set
● At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
■ The LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) lane departure warning function

In the following cases, the warning message will not be displayed even if a lane line is
crossed.
● When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system

functions

● When the lane lines cannot be recognized
● When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to

change lanes

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

739

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.
A warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking
the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the
warning message goes off.
Warning message

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that the brake
hold system is not hold Use the brake hold systhe vehicle when the tem when it becomes
vehicle is on a slippery available.
road
Indicates that the washer
Add washer fluid.
fluid level is low

(U.S.A. only)

perform
7

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Indicates that all maintenance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
If necessary,
soon.
maintenance.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.

740

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(U.S.A. only)

Details

Correction procedure

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven
distance on the maintenance schedule*.
Perform the necessary
Please
Comes on approxi- maintenance.
reset
the
maintenance
mately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the data after the maintemaintenance data has nance is performed
(P. 624)
been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)

Check the tire inflation
Indicates that the tire
pressure, and adjust to
inflation pressure is low
the appropriate level.
(If equipped)

(If equipped)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the power
switch off then on again.
If the tire pressure
Indicates a malfunction in
warning
indicator
the tire pressure warning
flashes for 1 minute
system
then illuminates, there
is a malfunction in the
system. Have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(If equipped)

Correction procedure

Drive for a short while
and check if the display
updates.
If the radio wave conditions improve, the display may return to
normal. If the tire pressure is still not displayed after driving for
Indicates that the tire
several minutes, stop
position information canthe vehicle in a safe
not be recognized
place, turn the power
switch off then on
again, and start driving.
If the tire pressure is still
not displayed even
after repeating this several times, have the
vehicle inspected at
your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the pre-collision system is not curCheck the grille cover
rently functional because
and the sensor and clean
the grille cover or the
them if they are dirty.
sensor is dirty
In case of overheating,
This message also
the system will become
appears when the prefunctional once the syscollision system is not
tem cools down.
functional due to overheating.

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

(Flashes)

Details

741

742

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light go off.
Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message


(Flashes)

Once

3
times
(Flashes)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Details

Correction
procedure

The electronic key
is not detected
when an attempt is
made to start the
hybrid system.

Start
the
hybrid system with the
electronic
key present.

The electronic key
was carried outside the vehicle and
a door other than
the driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
power switch was in
a mode other than
off.

Bring the
electronic
key back
into
the
vehicle.

The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was in
P and the power
switch was not
turned off.

Turn
the
power
switch off or
bring the
electronic
key back
into
the
vehicle.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

743

Details

Correction
procedure

An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors without first turning the
power switch off
when the shift lever
was in P.

Turn
the
power
switch off
and lock the
doors again.

(Flashes)

An attempt was
made to drive when
the regular key was
not inside the vehicle.

Confirm
that
the
electronic
key is inside
the vehicle.

(Flashes)

The driver’s door
was opened when
Shift
the
the shift lever was
shift lever to
not in P and the
P.
power switch was
not turned off.

Warning message

Continuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)

9
times

Continuous



When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

744

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

ConContinuous tinuous
(Displayed alternately)

Details

Correction
procedure

The driver’s door • Shift the
was opened and
shift lever
closed while the
to P.
electronic key was • Bring the
not in the vehicle,
electhe shift lever was
tronic key
not in P and the
back into
power switch was
the vehinot turned off.
cle.

(Flashes)



Continuous
(Flashes)

Once

Continuous
(Flashes)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart access system with push-button start while the
electronic key was
still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock
the
doors again.

An attempt was
made to lock either
front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock
button into the lock
position, then closing the door with
the electronic key
still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock
the
doors again.

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message


(Flashes)

Once


(Flashes)

745

Details

Correction
procedure

• When the doors
were unlocked
with the mechanical key and then
the power switch
was pressed, the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even after
the power switch
was pressed two
consecutive
times.

Touch the
electronic
key to the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.

An attempt was
made to start the
hybrid system with
the shift lever in an
incorrect position.

Shift
the
shift lever to
P and start
the hybrid
system.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

746

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer



Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message

Details

Correction
procedure



Next time
when starting
the
hybrid system,
increase the
engine
Power was turned
speed
off due to the autoslightly and
matic power off
maintain
function.
that level for
approximately
5
minutes to
recharge
the 12-volt
battery.



Replace the
The electronic key electronic
has a low battery.
key battery.
(P. 668)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Correction
procedure

The driver’s door
was opened and
closed with the
power
switch
turned off and then
the power switch
was put in ACCESSORY mode twice
without the hybrid
system
being
started.

Press the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.

During an hybrid
system starting procedure in the event
that the electronic
key was not functioning
properly
(P. 768), the
power switch was
touched with the
electronic key.

Press the
power
switch
within 10
seconds of
the buzzer
sounding.

(Flashes)

The steering lock
could
not
be
released within 3
seconds of the
power switch being
pressed.

Press the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal and
moving the
steering
wheel left
and right.

(Flashes)

The power switch
the
has been turned off Shift
with the shift lever shift lever to
in a position other P.
than P or N.



Once



GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Details

Warning message

(Flashes)

Once

747

748

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior
buzzer

Once

Exterior
buzzer

Warning message


(Flashes)

Details

Correction
procedure

After the power
switch has been
the
turned off with the Turn
shift lever in a posi- power
tion other than P, switch off.
the shift lever has
been shifted to P.

■ Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

749

If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.
For details about tires: P. 651
CAUTION
■ If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Stop the hybrid system.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 702)
7

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

750

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack handle

Wheel nut wrench

Parking brake release tool

Spare tire

Screwdriver

Jack

Towing eyelet

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

751

CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and

removing tire chains.

● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.

● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the

jack.

● Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported

by the jack.

● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If

there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

752

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the jack and jack handle
1

Remove the center luggage mat. (P. 582)

Remove the spacer and take out
the jack handle from the reverse
side of the center luggage mat.

Take out the jack.
1

For tightening

For loosening

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

753

Taking out the spare tire
1

Remove the center luggage mat. (P. 582)

Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.

CAUTION
■ When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the
body of the vehicle.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

754

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire
1

Chock the tires.

Flat tire
Front
Rear

Wheel chock positions

Left-hand side

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Left-hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indicate
the jack point positions.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4

Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.

755

When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

756

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the

vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts
while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the

tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed
for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

757

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire
1

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may
loosen while the vehicle is in motion,
causing the tire to come off.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion

Disc wheel
seat
Disc wheel
7

Washer

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
turn the wheel nuts until the
washers come into contact with
the disc wheel.

758

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each wheel nut two
or three times in the order shown
in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

759

■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on

the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.

● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(P. 790)

■ When using the compact spare tire

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire
pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■ When the compact spare tire is equipped

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires.
■ If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the
following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
1

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
7

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

760

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use

with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

● Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-

tions that cause sudden engine braking.

■ When the compact spare tire is attached

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
•
•
•
•
•

ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control
(if equipped)
• PCS (if equipped)
• EPS

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

• AFS (if equipped)
• AVS
• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
(if equipped)
• Rear view monitor system
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

761

CAUTION
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire
is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to
observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■ After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden
braking.

NOTICE
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
■ When replacing the tires

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
7

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

762

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:

The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed. (P. 189)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 768)
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.
● There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 79)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
● The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem

such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available
to start the hybrid system. (P. 763)

The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 770)
● The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

763

The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does
not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 770)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is functioning normally:
1

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing
the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

764

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted:
1

Set the parking brake.

Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

765

If the parking brake cannot be released
In the event that the 12-volt battery is discharged or switch operation
does not release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released
manually using the procedure below. This procedure should be performed only if necessary, such as in an emergency.
If the switch cannot be operated even when the 12-volt battery is normal, the parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Before releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to P.
● Turn the power switch off.
● Check that the parking brake indicator is off.
● Chock the tires.

Releasing the parking brake manually
1

Take out the parking brake
release tool and the screwdriver
from the trunk. (P. 750)

Take out the spare tire. (P. 749)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Fit the parking brake release tool into
the screwdriver handle.

766

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Remove the plug.

Insert the tool and press it down
firmly while turning it counterclockwise until it stops.

■ Manual operation of the parking brake

The parking brake cannot be set manually.

CAUTION
■ When releasing the parking brake manually
● Shift the shift lever to P, turn the power switch off and chock the tires. Failure to do

so may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.

● Turn the power switch off and check that the parking brake indicator is off. Failure

to do so may cause the system to operate and turn the inserted parking brake
release tool, resulting in an injury.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

767

If the electronic key does not operate properly
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 128) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and
wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and
trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following
the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key
linked functions
■

Doors
Use the mechanical key
(P. 118) in order to perform the
following operations:
1

Locks all the doors

Closes the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)

Unlocks the door

Opens the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)

*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.

768
■

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

Starting the hybrid system
1

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the power
switch.
The power switch will turn to ON
mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in
customization setting, the power
switch will turn to ACCESSORY
mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that
multi-information display.

Press the power switch.

is shown on the

In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your
Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

769

■ Stopping the hybrid system

Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.
■ Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 668)
■ Changing power switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step 3 above.
The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed.(P. 190)
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deac-

tivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features P. 807)

● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 127)

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

770

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the
12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
1

Open the trunk lid and remove
the 12-volt battery cover.
In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to
open the trunk. (P. 767)

Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

771

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch
off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.

Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not
come on, contact your Lexus dealer.

Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged

The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a

low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

■ Charging the 12-volt battery

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges
automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)

772

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

■ When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
● Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt

battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle
when the alarm operates.

● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access

system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

● The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has

recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

● The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is

reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery
was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.

CAUTION
■ Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is

not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.

● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to

come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as
brackets or unpainted metal.

● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with

each other.

● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-

volt battery.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

773

CAUTION
■ 12-volt battery precautions

The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
● When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

● Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
● In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.

● Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

● Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
■ After recharging the 12-volt battery

Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery
to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the 12-volt battery

P. 650

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

774

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red

zone:
The engine may be overheating.
● “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display:

The power control unit may be overheating.

Correction procedures
■

If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red
zone
1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.
If you see steam:
Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.

Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to fall and
then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4

775

After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently,
check the engine coolant level
and inspect the cooling system for leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 638

Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 787)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■

If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display
1

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.

Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the “Hybrid System Overheat” message disappears and
then stop the hybrid system.
If the message does not disappear, call your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

776

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
4

After the hybrid system has
cooled down, check the power
control unit coolant level and
inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 638

Add power control unit coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant
is unavailable. (P. 787)

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Overheating

If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is

experienced.

● “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display.
● Steam comes out from under the hood.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

777

CAUTION
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the

steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

● Keep hands and clothing away from the fans, etc. while the hybrid system is oper-

ating.

● For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline engine auto-

matically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to operate. Do not touch
or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans. Doing so may lead to fingers,
clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in injury.

● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the cool-

ant reservoir caps while the hybrid system
and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.

■ When adding engine/power control unit coolant

Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid
system.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use commercially available coolant additives.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

When trouble arises

NOTICE

778

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1

Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to
P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to
help provide traction.

Restart the hybrid system.

Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while
exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Press

to turn off TRAC.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

779

CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than

necessary.

● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-

cle may require towing to be freed.

When trouble arises

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

780

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

781

Vehicle specifications

8
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)................... 782
Fuel information.......................... 792
Tire information........................... 795
8-2. Customization
Customizable features ............807
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize..........................818

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

782

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length

190.7 in. (4845 mm)

Overall width

72.4 in. (1840 mm)

Overall height*

57.3 in. (1455 mm)

Wheelbase

112.2 in. (2850 mm)

Tread*

Front

62.0 in. (1575 mm)

Rear

62.6 in. (1590 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)

*: Unladen vehicle

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

825 lb. (370 kg)

8-1. Specifications

783

Vehicle identification
■

Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in
the engine compartment.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

■

Engine number

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.

784

8-1. Specifications

Engine
Model

3.5 L 6-cylinder (2GR-FXE)

Type

6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke

3.70  3.27 in. (94.0  83.0 mm)

Displacement

210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)

Valve clearance
(engine cold)

Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

Automatic adjustment

Fuel
Fuel type

Premium unleaded gasoline only

Octane Rating

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)

Electric motor (traction motor)
Type

Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output

147 kW

Maximum torque

275 N•m (28.0 kgf•m, 202.8 ft•lbf)

Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type

Nickel-Metal hydride battery

Voltage

7.2 V/module

Capacity

6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity

40 modules

Overall voltage

288 V

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

785

Lubrication system
Oil capacity
Drain and refill (Reference*)
With filter
Without filter

6.7 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■

Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

786

8-1. Specifications

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.

Outside temperature

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one
with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at
high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant
Standardization
and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the
oil you should use.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

787

Cooling system
Capacity

Gasoline
engine

9.9 qt. (9.4 L, 8.3 Imp.qt.)

Power
control unit

3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system
Spark plug
Make

DENSO FK20HBR8

Gap

0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
8

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

788

8-1. Specifications

Electrical system
12-volt battery
Open voltage at 68F 12.6  12.8 V Fully charged
(20C):
12.2  12.4 V Half charged
11.8  12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge

15 A max.
5 A max.

Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity*

6.01 qt. (5.69 L, 5.01 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE
■ Hybrid transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

789

Differential
Oil capacity

1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer
for further details.

Brakes
Pedal clearance*

4.5 in. (115 mm) Min.

Pedal free play

0.04 — 0.08 in. (1.0 — 2.0 mm)

Brake pad wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit

0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N,
51.0 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the
brake system warning light is not illuminated when the hybrid system is operating
(If the brake system warning light is illuminated, refer to P. 711).

Steering

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Vehicle specifications

Free play

790

8-1. Specifications

Tires and wheels


Type A

Tire size

225/50R17 94W

Front tire
Tire inflation pressure
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Rear tire
inflation pressure)
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size

17  7 1/2J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)



Type B

Tire size

235/45R18 94Y, P235/45R18 94V

Front tire
Tire inflation pressure
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
(Recommended cold tire
Rear tire
inflation pressure)
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size

18  8J

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)



Compact spare tire

Tire size

T155/70D17 110M, T145/70D18 107M

Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
inflation pressure)
Wheel size

17  4T (T155/70D17), 18  4T (T145/70D18)

Wheel nut torque

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

791

8-1. Specifications

Light bulbs
Light Bulbs

Exterior

Interior

Bulb No.

Type

Discharge headlights*



Fog lights*



Front turn signal lights

7444NA

28/8

Rear turn signal lights

W21W

Back-up lights

W16W

Outer foot lights

W5W

Door courtesy lights



Vanity lights



Trunk light



3.8

A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

*: If equipped

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

792

8-1. Specifications

Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine
performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number
91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may
result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected
by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which
is expected to be applied worldwide.

● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels.

In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and

improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

793

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid

the build-up of engine deposits.

● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep

clean intake systems.

■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates
such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing a maximum of

10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that
could contain more than 10% ethanol,
including from any pump labeled E15, E30,
E50, E85 (which are only some examples
of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)

● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than

87.

● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or

driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

794

8-1. Specifications

NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam-

aged.

● Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level

previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■ Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

795

Tire information
Typical tire symbols


Full-size tire



Compact spare tire

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

796

8-1. Specifications

Tire size

(P. 798)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(P. 797)

Location of treadwear indicators

(P. 651)

Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form
the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a biasply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type
tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 802)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(P. 802)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
9

Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tires or all season tires

(P. 656)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.
11

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

797

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
1

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

798

8-1. Specifications

Tire size
■

Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.

■

Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions
1

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

799

Tire section names
1

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

800

8-1. Specifications

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this
information.
■

DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■

Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications
■

801

Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated
and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

802

8-1. Specifications

Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
Cold tire inflation presthree hours or more, or has not been driven more
sure
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres- The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
sure
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended
pressure

inflation Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine

The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle
(b) Accessory weight
weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below

The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
Production options weight
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

803

Meaning

Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code

Rim width

Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
(Total load capacity)
kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
Vehicle maximum load on
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
the tire
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
Vehicle normal load on
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (disthe tire
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire

Bead

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation

A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

Weather side

804

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Groove

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
Intended outboard sidedeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall
wall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum
permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
inflation pressure
may be inflated
Measuring rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements

Open splice

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

805

Meaning
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
) on
at least one sidewall

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

Overall width

806

8-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Meaning

Test rim

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road

Tread rib

A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire

Tread separation

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators
(TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing

*: Table 1  Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various
designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants

Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat,
1 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

8-2. Customization

807

Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by
using the “DISP” button, by using the Remote Touch, or at your Lexus
dealer.

Customizing vehicle features
■

Changing by using the Remote Touch


Vehicles without a navigation system

“Vehicle Settings” screen displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
(P. 336)

Select “Vehicle Customization” on the “Vehicle Settings”
screen.
“Vehicle Customization” screen
will appear.

Choose a category displayed on the screen to display the settings.

Select the setting to be changed. Change each setting.

For items with sensor sensitivity that can be changed, select “+” or “-” to
choose the desired level, then select “OK”.
5

A message indicating that the settings are being saved will appear.
Do not perform any other operations while this message is displayed.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

For items that can be enabled/disabled, and for items with an operating time
that can be changed, select “On” or “Off”, or select the desired operating time.

808

8-2. Customization


Vehicles with a navigation system

Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
■

Changing by using the “DISP” button
P. 98

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

809

8-2. Customization

Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
1

Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch

Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button

Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Item

Function

“Language”*1

Default
setting

“English”

Customized setting

(French)

— O —

(Spanish)
“Units”*1

Multi-information
display
(P. 94)

“ECO lamp”

“km
(L/100km)”

— O —

“OFF”

“ON
(Self-lighting)”

“ON
(Always)”

“Outside”

“Fuel
consumption”

— O —

“Cruising
range”

“Tachometer Settings”

“HV Meter
“ON
(Always)”
— O —
(Selfchanging)” “Tachometer
(Always)”

“Lamp brightness”

“Standard”

“Bright”

— O —

“ON”

“OFF”

— O —

“SPORT lamp”

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

“Drive monitor”

“miles
(MPG)”

“km
(km/L)”

810

8-2. Customization

Default
setting

Customized setting

“EV driving Indicator”

“ON”

“OFF”

— O —

“Default settings”

“OFF”

“ON”

— O —

Item
Multi-information
display
(P. 94)

Function

On
“Unlock on Second Key (Driver’s
Off
Turn”
door
(Allows all doors to be unlocked in (All doors
O — O
unlocked by turning the one step, all unlocked in
one step)
mechanical key twice in
doors
the driver’s door)
unlocked in
two steps)

Door lock
(P. 137,
767)

“Auto Lock by Speed”
(All doors are automatically locked when vehicle
speed is approximately 12
mph [20 km/h] or higher)

Off

O — O

“Auto Lock by Shift from P”
(All doors are automatically locked when shifting
the shift lever to position
other than P)

Off

O — O

“Auto Unlock by Shift to P”
(All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P)

Off

O — O

“Auto Unlock by Driver
Door”
(All doors are automatically unlocked when
driver’s door is opened)

Off

O — O

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

811

8-2. Customization

Item

Smart
access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 121)
and
wireless
remote
control
(P. 134)

Default
setting

“Lock/Unlock FeedbackTone”
(Adjust the volume of
buzzer sounds)

“Lock/Unlock FeedbackLights”
(Enable/disable the operation of the emergency
flashers when the vehicle is
locked or unlocked)

Customized setting

Off
O — O
1 to 7

Off

O — O

Off

“Auto Relock Timer”
(Adjust the time elapsed
before the automatic door
lock function is activated if
a door is not opened after
being unlocked)

60
seconds

Open door reminder
buzzer (When locking the
vehicle)

Off

—

“Access System with Elec.
Key”
(Smart access system with
push-button start can be
disabled)

Off

O — O

120
seconds
— O

“Select Doors to Unlock”
(The doors that are
unlocked using the smart
access system with pushbutton start can be
selected)

Driver’s
door

Number of consecutive
door lock operations

2 times

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

30
seconds

All the
doors

O — O

As many as
—
desired

— O

Vehicle specifications

Smart
access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 121)

Function

812

8-2. Customization

Item

Function
Wireless remote control

Wireless
remote
control
(P. 134)

Default
setting

Customized setting

Off

—

— O

On
(Driver’s
“Remote 2-Press Unlock”
Off
door
(Allows all doors to be
unlocked in (All doors
O — O
unlocked by pressing
one step, all unlocked in
on the electronic
one step)
doors
key twice)
unlocked in
two steps)
One short
press
Trunk unlocking operation

Press and Push twice
—
hold (short) Press and
hold (long)

— O

Off
Alarm (panic mode)

Front seats
(P. 148)

Power
windows
(P. 164)
and moon
roof
(P. 167)

Off

—

— O

“Driver’s Seat Easy Exit”
(Driver’s seat movement
when exiting the vehicle)

Standard

Selecting the door linking
driving position memory
with door unlock operation

Driver’s
door

All doors

—

— O

Off

—

— O

Wireless remote control
linked operation

Off

On
(Open
only)

—

— O

Buzzer sounds if operated
using wireless remote control

Off

—

— O

Mechanical
operation

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

key

linked

Off
Partial

O — O

813

8-2. Customization

Item

Function

Default
setting

Customized setting

5
7

Turn signal
lever
(P. 205)

The number of times the
turn signal lights flash automatically when the turn signal lever is moved to the
first position during a lane
change
(After flashing the turn signal lights when turning left
or right while this function
is off and the turn signal
lever is moved to the first
position in direction of the
flashing light, the turn signal lights can be selected
to be flashing or off.)

Off
(the turn
signal lights
will be off if
the turn
signal lever
is moved to
the first
position in
direction of
flashing
light)

— O

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Off
(the turn
signal lights
keep flashing if the
turn signal
lever is
moved to
the first
position in —
direction of
flashing
light)

814

8-2. Customization

Function

Default
setting

Customized setting

“Headlamps-On Sensitivity”
(Adjust the sensitivity of the
ambient light sensor)

Standard

-2 to 2

Item

Automatic
“Headlamps
Auto-Off
light control
Timer”
system
(Adjust the time elapsed
(P. 213)
before the headlights automatically turn off)

Lights
(P. 213)

Intuitive
parking
assist*2
(P. 261)

O — O

Off
30
seconds

60
seconds

O — O

90
seconds

Welcome light illumination
control

Off

—

“Daytime Running Lights”
(Daytime running lights
can be disabled)*3

Off

O — O

“Detection (Front)”
(Detection distance of the
front center sensor)

Far

Near

O — O

“Detection (Rear)”
(Detection distance of the
rear center sensor)

Far

Near

O — O

“Alert Volume”
(Alert volume can be
adjusted)

1 to 5

O — O

— O

“Display”
All sensors
Display off O — O
(when intuitive parking
displayed
assist is operating)
“Auto A/C Mode”
(A/C Auto switch operaAutomatic
air condition- tion)
ing system
“Smog Sensor Sensitivity”
(P. 364) (Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Off

O — O

Standard

-3 to 3

O — O

815

8-2. Customization

Function

Default
setting

Customized setting

Interior lights illumination
control

Off

—

— O

Item

Illumination
(P. 571)

7.5
seconds

“Interior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off)

15
seconds

Operation after the power
switch is turned off

Off

—

— O

Operation when the doors
are unlocked

Off

—

— O

Operation when you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person

Off

—

— O

Footwell lighting

Off

—

— O

Outer foot lights

Off

—

— O

30
seconds

O — O

Off
“Exterior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
outer foot lights turn off)

15
seconds

7.5
seconds

O — O

30
seconds
8

Vehicle specifications

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

816

8-2. Customization

Function

Default
setting

Customized setting

Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person

Off

—

— O

Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch

Off

—

— O

Reverse operation

Off

—

— O

—

— O

Item

Illumination
(P. 571)

Rear
sunshade
(P. 594)

0 second
Time elapsed before the
reverse operation feature
activates

0.7
seconds

*1: The default setting varies according to countries.
*2: If equipped
*3: U.S.A. only

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

0.9
seconds
1.2
seconds

8-2. Customization

817

■ Vehicle customization
● When the “Auto Lock by Speed” and “Auto Lock by Shift from P” are both on, the

door lock operates as follows.

• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be
locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” would
not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” will
operate.
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the “Select Doors to
Unlock” cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the “Auto Relock

Timer” activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the “Lock/
Unlock Feedback-Tone” and the “Lock/Unlock Feedback-Lights” settings.

■ When customizing using the Remote Touch

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.
Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the hybrid system operating while
customizing the features.

CAUTION
■ During customization

As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and
enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
8

■ During customization

To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating
while customizing features.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Vehicle specifications

NOTICE

818

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
Item

When to initialize

Reference

Maintenance data

• After the maintenance is performed

P. 624

Tire pressure warning system

• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

P. 654

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

819

For owners

9
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................820
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) ............................................... 821
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French) .............................................823

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

820

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

821

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
● Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière

jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre
entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit
cependant pas toucher le cou ni
glisser de l’épaule.
● Placez la ceinture abdominale le

plus bas possible sur les hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier.

Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du
siège, le dos droit.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de

sécurité.

Guide des ceintures de sécurité (sièges latéraux arrière)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For owners

Pour les enfants ou les personnes de
taille inférieure à la moyenne, faites
glisser le guide de la ceinture de
sécurité vers l’avant, de sorte que la
ceinture épaulière ne repose pas
près du cou de cette personne.

822

Entretien et soin
■

Ceintures de sécurité
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de
l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer
qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.
ATTENTION

■ Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Assurez-vous qu’il
n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures
de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les
blessures graves, voire mortelles.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

823

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.

For owners

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

824

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS avant
1

Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/Coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant
Peuvent protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs

Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant
Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager
avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants.

◆ Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
3

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux
arrière

Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des
sièges latéraux

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

825

Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

2
3
4
5
6

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For owners

Système de classification de 9 Coussins gonflables latéraux
l’occupant du siège du passager
avant
avant (ECU et capteurs)
10 Lampe témoin SRS
Capteurs de choc latéral 11 Coussin gonflable du conduc(portières avant)
teur
Coussins gonflables de protec- 12 Coussins gonflables latéraux
tion des genoux
arrière
Coussin gonflable du passager 13 Capteurs de choc latéral
avant
(arrière)
Coussins gonflables en rideau
14 Capteur de position de siège du
Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR
conducteur
BAG OFF”
15 Contacteur de boucle de ceinDispositifs de tension et limitture de sécurité du conducteur
eurs de force des ceintures de 16 Module de capteur de coussin
sécurité
gonflable
Capteurs de choc latéral 17 Contacteur de boucle de cein(avant)
ture de sécurité du passager
avant
18 Capteurs de choc avant

826
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont
la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur
américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable
(ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des
informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le
diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations
comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’impact et aux passagers. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction
chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour limiter le mouvement des
occupants.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

827
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables
SRS.
Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de

sécurité de la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être
utilisés de concert avec les ceintures de sécurité.

● Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable

et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, donne les recommandations
suivantes :
La zone à risque d’un coussin gonflable côté conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à
75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une
marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable.
Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si
vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs manières :

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For owners

• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre
encore aisément les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs
peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se
trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier
du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le
dossier du siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus
haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et
vers le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA,
tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue sur les commandes
du tableau de bord.

828
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été

reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité
des sièges avant sans avoir été attachée à la
plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécurité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant considéreront que le conducteur et le passager
avant portent tout de même leur ceinture
même si elles ne sont pas attachées. Les
coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent
alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors
d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque
de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Bouclez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité lorsque vous utilisez la rallonge.
● Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force
considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège
du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le
dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
● Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire

mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant
trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à
l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de
placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges
arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont
plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

● N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le

siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumée.
En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du passager avant sont telles qu’elles pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants du type dos à la route était installé sur
le siège du passager avant.

● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et

ne vous appuyez pas sur le tableau de bord.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

829
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au

coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni
s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager
avant.

● Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège avant

tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.

● Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur

le brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.

● Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la

portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

● Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones

telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de
volant, la partie inférieure du tableau de
bord et la porte de la boîte à gants.
Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS
du conducteur, du passager avant ou de
protection des genoux se déploient.

les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou
arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée de maintien.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

For owners

● Ne fixez rien sur les portières, le pare-brise,

830
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
● N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements.

Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS en rideau.

● Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin

SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.

● N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gon-

flables SRS latéraux se déploient, car ceux-ci pourraient nuire au déploiement de
ces coussins. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables
latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer
accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

● Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des

composants de coussins gonflables SRS.
Vous risquez de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables
SRS.

● Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement

après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.

● Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gon-

flables SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez
le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez
tous les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.

● Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, notamment le

tampon de volant, la porte de la boîte à gants et les garnitures des montants avant
et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

831
ATTENTION
■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables

SRS

Ne mettez pas le véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suivantes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables
SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
● Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
● Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de

bord, de la planche de bord, de la boîte à gants, des sièges ou du capitonnage
des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, ou des brancards de pavillon

● Réparations ou modifications de l’aile ou du pare-chocs avant, ou du côté de

l’habitacle

● Installation de lames de déneigement, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre avant (barre

safari, barre kangourou, etc.)

● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un

lecteur de CD

● Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques

réduites

For owners

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

832

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

833

Index
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)................................834
Alphabetical index................................ 840

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the navigation
system.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

834

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
● If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys

can be made by your Lexus dealer. (P. 119)
● If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft

increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
(P. 120)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 668)
● Is the power switch in ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (P. 190)
● Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition of

the radio wave. (P. 128)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

835

The rear door cannot be opened
● Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when
the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then
unlock the child-protector lock. (P. 138)

The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
● The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside

the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take
the key out from the trunk. (P. 122)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

836

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start
● Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the

brake pedal? (P. 189)
● Is the shift lever in P? (P. 192)
● Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?

(P. 124)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 193)
● Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary
way. (P. 768)
● Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (P. 770)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the
brake pedal
● Is the power switch in ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake
pedal with the power switch in ON mode (P. 764)

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is
stopped
● It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle.

(P. 192)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

837

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches
● Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 164)

The power switch is turned off automatically
● The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left

in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not operating) for a period of time. (P. 192)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(P. 714)
● The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 207)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may
also sound. (P. 711, 721)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

838

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the

alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 81)
To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON mode or start the
hybrid system.

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
● Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?

Check the message on the multi-information display.
(P. 728)

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
● When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis-

played, refer to P. 711, 721.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

839

When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the

spare tire. (P. 749)

The vehicle becomes stuck
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud,

dirt, or snow. (P. 778)

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

840

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index
A
A/C............................................................ 364
Air conditioning filter....................... 666
Front automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................364
Rear air conditioning system........379
S-FLOW mode..................................374
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................725
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS) ........................................................215
Adaptive Variable Suspension
system (AVS)......................................290
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System)....................................................215
Air conditioning filter.......................... 666
Air conditioning system..................... 364
Air conditioning filter....................... 666
Front automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................364
Rear air conditioning system........379
S-FLOW mode..................................374

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Airbags........................................................ 38
Airbag operating conditions .......... 46
Airbag precautions
for your child ......................................... 41
Airbag warning light .......................... 712
Correct driving posture....................30
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions ....................... 46
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................................... 44
Front passenger occupant
classification system......................... 49
General airbag precautions ............. 41
Locations of airbags............................38
Modification and disposal
of airbags............................................... 45
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................................. 46
Side airbag precautions ...................... 41
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions ....................... 46
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions ............................................ 41
SRS airbags .............................................38

Alphabetical index

Alarm..............................................................81
Alarm............................................................ 81
Warning buzzer .......................... 711, 721
Anchor brackets...................................... 62
Antennas (smart access system
with push-button start)......................123
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................725
Approach warning (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 242
Armrest ....................................................593
Ashtrays....................................................585
Assist grips ..............................................598
Audio input.............................................. 497
Audio system..........................................386
Audio input............................................497
AUX port/
USB port.....................497, 477, 487
Bluetooth® audio.............................. 465
CD/DVD player................................433
CD/DVD player information......453
DVD video............................................. 441
iPod.......................................................... 485
MP3/WMA disc ...............................435
Optimal use ......................................... 495
Portable music player......................497
Radio ....................................................... 409
Rear seat audio controls ............... 498
Steering wheel audio switch ....... 503
USB memory.......................................475

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

841

Automatic headlight leveling
system...................................................... 216
Automatic light control system ........213
AUX port .................................................497
Auxiliary boxes .....................................580
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension system) ......................... 290

B
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................696
Wattage ...................................................791
Battery (12-volt battery) .....................647
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged......................................... 770
Preparing and checking before
winter......................................................319
Warning light......................................... 712
Battery (traction battery) ......................74
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) ............... 305
Bluetooth®
Audio system.......................................465
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ...................... 506
Brake
Brake Hold .............................................210
Fluid ..........................................................645
Parking brake ...................................... 207
Regenerative braking..........................72
Warning light.................................711, 714
Warning message............................... 721

842

Alphabetical index

Brake assist .............................................289
Brake Hold............................................... 210
Break-in tips..............................................173
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control...........91
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)................305

C
Care................................................. 616, 620
Aluminum wheels ................................617
Exterior..................................................... 616
Interior .................................................... 620
Seat belts................................................. 621
Cargo capacity....................................... 186
Cargo hooks ........................................... 581
Caution label..............................................74
CD player ................................................ 433
Chains .........................................................321
Child restraint system............................ 55
Booster seats, definition ....................55
Booster seats, installation..................65
Convertible seats, definition............55
Convertible seats, installation.........62
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................49
Infant seats, definition..........................55
Infant seats, installation .......................62
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors .....................60
Installing CRS with seat belts..........62
Installing CRS
with top tether strap.........................66

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Child safety.................................................54
12-volt battery
precautions ........................... 649, 773
Airbag precautions................................ 41
Child restraint system.........................55
How your child should wear
the seat belt................................. 33, 35
Installing child restraints ....................59
Moon roof precautions ....................170
Power window lock switch.............164
Power window precautions...........166
Rear door child-protectors........... 138
Removed electronic
key battery precautions ..............669
Seat belt comfort guide..................... 33
Seat belt extender precautions ......37
Seat belt precautions..........................58
Seat heater precautions .................592
Trunk precautions ...............................144
Child-protectors ....................................138
Cleaning ........................................ 616, 620
Aluminum wheels................................617
Exterior .....................................................616
Interior.....................................................620
Seat belts..................................................621
Clock......................................................... 584
Coat hooks ..............................................597
Condenser...............................................644

Alphabetical index

Console box ............................................577
Console box light ..................................577
Consumption screen ............................. 113
Coolant..................................................... 642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................................... 319
Cooling system ..................................... 642
Engine overheating........................... 774
Hybrid system overheating .......... 774
Cruise control
Cruise control......................................232
Dynamic radar cruise control......236
Cup holders............................................578
Curtain shield airbags ........................... 39
Customizable features.......................807

D
Daytime running light system............216
Defogger
Front windshield ...................................371
Outside rear view mirrors............ 384
Rear window ....................................... 384
Differential............................................... 789
Dimensions ............................................. 782
Dinghy towing......................................... 188

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

843

Display
Dynamic radar cruise control ..... 236
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........255
Multi-information display.................. 94
Remote Touch screen ....................330
Trip information.....................................95
Warning message............................... 721
Do-it-yourself maintenance...............631
Door courtesy lights
Location ...................................................571
Wattage ...................................................791
Door lock
Doors......................................................... 137
Smart access system with
push-button start................................121
Wireless remote control..................134
Doors .......................................................... 137
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system....................139
Door glasses..........................................164
Door lock................................................. 137
Open door warning buzzer ..........125
Open door warning light ................ 714
Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161
Rear door child-protector ............. 138

844

Alphabetical index

Driver’s seat position memory......... 150
Driving.........................................................172
Break-in tips ...........................................173
Correct driving posture ....................30
Driving mode select switch ......... 286
Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317
Procedures .............................................172
Winter drive tips.................................. 319
DVD player................................... 433, 441
Dynamic radar cruise control ......... 236
Function ..................................................236
Warning message................. 723, 734

E
Eco drive mode.....................................286
EDR (Event data recorder).................... 11
Electric motor (traction motor)......... 70
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................726
Electronic key ...........................................118
Battery-saving function.....................127
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.............................767
Replacing the battery...................... 668

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Emergency, in case of
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged......................................... 770
If the electronic key
does not operate properly........ 767
If the hybrid system
will not start ....................................... 762
If the parking brake
cannot be released .......................765
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............ 764
If the warning buzzer sounds..........711
If the warning light turns on ..............711
If the warning message
is displayed.......................................... 721
If you have a flat tire.......................... 749
If you think something
is wrong ................................................710
If your vehicle becomes
stuck...................................................... 778
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.............................703
If your vehicle needs
to be towed.......................................704
If your vehicle overheats.................774
Emergency flashers .............................702

Alphabetical index

Energy monitor ........................................110
Engine
Accessory mode.................................190
Compartment......................................637
Engine switch........................................189
Hood ........................................................634
How to start the hybrid system....189
Identification number .......................783
Ignition switch
(power switch)..................................189
Overheating ......................................... 774
Power switch.........................................189
Engine compartment cover.............638
Engine coolant....................................... 642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ........................................................89
Engine oil .................................................639
Capacity ................................................ 785
Checking............................................... 639
Oil level warning message ...........733
Oil pressure
warning message ........................... 722
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

845

Engine oil maintenance data............624
Engine switch...........................................189
EPS
(Electronic Power Steering) ........ 289
Function..................................................289
Warning light......................................... 712
Warning message............................. 726
EV drive mode ........................................196
Event data recorder (EDR).....................11

F
First-aid kit storage net........................581
Flat tire.......................................................749
Floor mats................................................... 28
Fluid
Brake........................................................789
Hybrid transmission .........................788
Washer...................................................646
Fog lights....................................................218
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 689
Switch ........................................................218
Wattage ...................................................791
Footwell light............................................ 571
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................49
Front personal lights ............................572

846

Alphabetical index

Front seats ................................................ 148
Adjustment............................................. 148
Cleaning................................................ 620
Correct driving posture ....................30
Driving position memory ................150
Head restraints.....................................155
Power easy access system ............ 153
Seat heaters .........................................590
Seat position memory.......................150
Seat ventilators..................................... 591
Front side marker lights .......................213
Light switch .............................................213
Replacing light bulbs........................697
Welcome light illumination
control..................................................... 121
Front turn signal lights ........................205
Replacing light bulbs......................... 691
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Wattage....................................................791
Fuel ............................................................. 784
Capacity .................................................784
Fuel gauge................................................89
Information ............................................792
Refueling................................................. 227
Type ..............................................227, 784
Warning light .........................................714
Warning messages........................... 737
Fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption...............96
Average fuel consumption
after refueling.......................................95
Current fuel consumption................95

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Fuel filler door.........................................227
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened.........................230
Refueling .................................................227
Fuses...........................................................670

G
Garage door opener..........................600
Gauges........................................................ 89
Glove box ................................................576
Glove box light.......................................576
H
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)........................... 506
HD Radio® system................................ 414
Head restraints........................................155
Headlight cleaner .................................226
Headlights................................................. 213
Adaptive Front-lighting
System (AFS).....................................215
Discharge headlights
precautions .......................................699
Headlight leveling
warning message............................724
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Wattage ...................................................791
Headlights aim ...................................... 685
Head-up display .....................................102

Alphabetical index

Heaters
Air conditioning system..................364
Heated steering wheel...................588
Seat heaters .........................................590
Outside rear view mirrors............ 384
High-voltage components ...................74
Hood.......................................................... 634
Open........................................................634
Warning message.............................728
Hooks
Cargo hooks.........................................581
Coat hooks ...........................................597
Luggage hook......................................581
Retaining hooks (floor mat).............28
Utility hook ........................................... 599
Horn.............................................................212
Hybrid battery (traction battery) .......74
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
air vents .................................................... 75
Hybrid system........................................... 70
Emergency shut off system..............75
Energy monitor/
consumption screen ......................109
EV drive mode..................................... 196
High voltage components ............... 74
Hybrid System Indicator ...................92
Hybrid system precautions.............. 74
Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317
If the hybrid system
will not start........................................762
Overheating ......................................... 774
Power (ignition) switch ....................189
Starting the hybrid system..............189
Vehicle proximity notification
system .......................................................71

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

847

Hybrid System Indicator .......................92
Hybrid transmission ..............................199
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............ 764
Paddle shift switches..........................201
S mode.................................................... 202

I
I/M test ..................................................... 630
Identification
Engine .....................................................783
Vehicle....................................................783
Ignition switch (power switch)..........189
Illuminated entry system ....................573
Immobilizer system .................................79
Indicators.....................................................87
Initialization
Maintenance ........................................ 624
Moon roof...............................................169
Power windows....................................165
Tire pressure
warning system ...............................653
Initiators (tire pressure
warning system) ................................ 659
Inside door handle lights ..................... 571
Inside rear view mirror.........................159
Instrument panel light control.............. 91
Interior lights ............................................ 571
Intuitive parking assist .......................... 261
Function....................................................261
Warning message..................723, 734

848

Alphabetical index

J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 635
Vehicle-equipped jack .................. 750
Jack handle................................................. 750
Jam protection function
Moon roof ..............................................168
Power trunk opener
and closer............................................ 143
Power windows................................... 165

K
Keyless entry ............................................. 121
Smart access system
with push-button start ..................... 121
Wireless remote control ................. 134
Keys...............................................................118
Battery-Saving Function...................127
Electronic key .........................................118
Engine switch........................................189
If the electronic key
does not operate properly ........767
Key number plate .................................118
Keyless entry .................................121, 134
Mechanical key......................................118
Power switch.........................................189
Replacing the battery...................... 668
Warning buzzer .................................. 125
Wireless remote control key ........ 134
Knee airbags ............................................. 39

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

L
Language
(multi-information display)............... 98
LATCH anchors...................................... 60
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.........................634
Hood lock release lever.................634
Internal trunk release lever .............144
Shift lever .................................................199
Turn signal lever.................................205
Wiper lever.............................................219
Lexus Enform*
Lexus night view ...................................... 311
License plate lights ................................ 213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................................. 689
Wattage ...................................................791

Alphabetical index

Lights
Fog light switch .................................... 218
Headlight switch...................................213
Illuminated entry system.................573
Interior light...........................................572
Interior lights list................................... 571
Personal lights .....................................572
Replacing light bulbs....................... 689
Trunk light ............................................... 143
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Vanity lights ......................................... 583
Wattage....................................................791
Welcome light illumination
control..................................................... 121
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)...............251
Operation..............................................252
Warning
messages........ 724, 734, 735, 736
Load capacity.......................................... 186
Lock steering column ...........................192
Low profile tire.......................................656
Luggage hook......................................... 581
Luggage security system.....................142

849

M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ...........631
General maintenance .....................626
Maintenance data.............................. 782
Maintenance requirements .......... 623
Malfunction indicator lamp................ 712
Master warning light............................. 714
Meter............................................................ 89
Head-up display ..................................102
Indicators .................................................. 87
Instrument panel light control ..........91
Meters ........................................................89
Multi-information display.................. 94
Warning lights........................................85
Micro dust and pollen filter...............374
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror......................159
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers...........................................384
Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161
Vanity mirrors .....................................583
Moon roof ................................................. 167
Door lock linked
moon roof operation..................... 168
Jam protection function................... 168
Operation................................................167
Warning message............................. 729
MP3 disc ................................................. 435

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

850

Alphabetical index

Multi-information display..................... 94
Dynamic radar cruise control......236
Energy monitor......................................110
Lane-Keeping Assist....................... 255
Language..................................................98
Switching the display...........................95
Trip information .....................................95
Warning message...............................721

N
Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle ....................... 8

O
Odometer ..................................................89
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 785
Differential oil ...................................... 789
Opener
Hood ........................................................634
Trunk ........................................................... 141
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights .................................. 571
Wattage....................................................791

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Outside rear view mirrors................... 161
Adjusting and folding ......................... 161
Blind spot monitor ............................305
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................162
Mirror position memory ................. 150
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers............................384
Outside temperature display............. 95
Overheating............................................774

P
Paddle shift switches.............................201
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist).................... 261
Parking brake .........................................207
If the parking brake
cannot be released .......................765
Operation.............................................. 207
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer...............................730
Parking brake engaged
warning message...........................730
Parking lights ........................................... 213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121

Alphabetical index

PCS (Pre-Collision System)............ 296
Function ..................................................296
PCS OFF switch ................................297
Warning light .........................................713
Warning
message........................723, 735, 741
Personal lights........................................ 572
Power control unit ...................................74
Power control unit coolant............... 642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................................... 319
Power easy access system ................ 153
Power outlets .........................................586
Power steering (Electric Power
Steering system)................................289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................726
Power switch........................................... 189
Power trunk opener and closer ........ 141
Power windows.......................................164
Door lock linked
window operation........................... 166
Jam protection function...................165
Operation............................................... 164
Window lock switch.......................... 164

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

851

Pre-Collision System (PCS).............296
Function..................................................296
PCS OFF switch................................ 297
Warning light.........................................713
Warning
message........................ 723, 735, 741

R
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control).........................236
Radiator.....................................................644
Radio ......................................................... 409
RBDS (Radio Broadcast
Data Systems) ...................................... 412
Rear air conditioning system............379
Rear door sunshades.......................... 595
Rear personal lights .............................572
Rear side marker lights........................ 213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121
Rear seat heaters ................................. 590
Rear sunshade....................................... 594
Operation..............................................594
Reverse operation feature ............595

852

Alphabetical index

Rear turn signal lights .........................205
Replacing light bulbs....................... 695
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Wattage....................................................791
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror.....................159
Outside rear view mirrors................161
Rear view monitor system .................274
Rear window defoggers ....................384
Refueling ...................................................227
Capacity .................................................784
Fuel types ...............................................784
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened ........................ 230
Opening the fuel tank cap.............229
Regenerative braking.............................72
Remote Touch .......................................328
Remote Touch screen........................330
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 668
Fuses........................................................ 670
Light bulbs............................................ 687
Tires ..........................................................749
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................................820
Reset the maintenance data ............ 624
Road accident cautions .........................77

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

S
Safety Connect ......................................607
Seat belts .....................................................32
Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33
Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34
Child restraint system
installation ............................................. 62
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt.........................................621
Emergency Locking
Retractor................................................ 34
How to wear your seat belt..............32
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 35
Pre-collision seat belts....................... 34
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use ......................................... 36
Reminder light and buzzer............. 714
Seat belt extender ................................ 35
Seat belt pretensioners...................... 34
SRS warning light ................................ 712
Seat heaters............................................ 590
Seat position memory ..........................150
Seat ventilators........................................591
Seating capacity .....................................186

Alphabetical index

Seats............................................................ 148
Adjustment............................................. 148
Adjustment precautions .................. 149
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................59
Cleaning................................................ 620
Driving position memory ................150
Head restraints.....................................155
Power easy access system ............ 153
Properly sitting in the seat ................30
Seat heaters .........................................590
Seat position memory.......................150
Seat ventilators..................................... 591
Sensor
Automatic headlight system.......... 216
Driver monitor sensor .................... 298
Humidity sensor .................................376
Inside rear view mirror.....................160
Intuitive parking assist....................... 261
Lexus night view.................................. 315
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........259
Radar sensor .................245, 298, 310
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers...................................................224
Service plug................................................74
Service reminder indicators ............... 84

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

853

S-FLOW mode......................................374
Shift lever...................................................199
Hybrid transmission ...........................199
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............ 764
Shift lever light ......................................... 571
Shift lock system ....................................764
Side airbags................................................39
Side marker lights ..................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light illumination
control......................................................121
Side mirrors............................................... 161
Adjusting and folding ......................... 161
BSM (Blind spot monitor) ............305
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................162
Mirror position memory ................. 150
Side turn signal lights.......................... 205
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Turn signal lever.................................205
Smart access system
with push-button start.........................121
Antenna location..................................123
Entry functions ........................................121
Starting the hybrid system.............. 189
Warning message..............................727
Snow mode............................................. 200
Snow tires................................................ 323

854

Alphabetical index

Spare tire.................................................. 749
Inflation pressure............................... 790
Storage location ................................ 750
Spark plug ............................................... 787
Specifications......................................... 782
Speedometer ............................................89
Sport mode .............................................286
Steering lock ............................................192
Column lock release......................... 193
Steering lock system
warning message ........................... 747
Steering wheel........................................ 158
Adjustment.............................................158
Audio switches................................... 503
Heated steering wheel...................588
Power easy access system ............ 153
Steering wheel
position memory..............................150
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs........................697
Storage feature ..................................... 574
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck ........778
Sun shade
Rear.......................................................... 594
Rear door.............................................. 595
Roof............................................................168
Sun visors.................................................583

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Switches
AFS OFF switch...................................215
Audio remote control
switches ..............................................503
Brake hold switch................................210
BSM (Blind spot monitor)
switch ...................................................305
Cruise control switch .......... 232, 236
“DISP” button..........................................95
Door lock switches............................. 137
Driving mode select switch..........286
Driving position memory
switches ............................................... 150
Emergency flashers switch........... 702
EV drive mode switch ......................196
Fog light switch.....................................218
Garage door opener
switches ............................................. 600
Headlight cleaner switch............... 226
Heated steering wheel
switch .................................................. 588
HUD (Head-up display)
switches ................................................102
Ignition switch....................................... 189
Intuitive parking assist........................261
Lexus night view switch......................311
Light switch.............................................213
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
switch ...................................................253
Moon roof switches ...........................167
Outside rear view mirror
switches ................................................. 161

Alphabetical index

Paddle shift switches ......................... 201
Parking brake switches...................207
PCS OFF switch ................................297
Power door lock switch ...................137
Power switch.........................................189
Power window switches ................. 164
Rear sunshade switch..................... 594
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
switch................................................... 384
Seat heater switches........................590
Seat ventilator switches ...................591
Snow mode switch........................... 200
“SOS” button....................................... 607
Talk switch ............................................ 353
Telephone switches......................... 507
Tilt and telescopic
steering control switch .................158
Tire pressure warning reset
switch................................................... 654
Trunk closer switch.............................142
Trunk opener switch ........................... 141
Trunk opener main switch...............142
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button ...................................................239
VSC OFF switch ................................ 291
Window lock switch.......................... 164
Windshield wipers
and washer switch .......................... 219

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

855

T
Tachometer ..................................... 89, 104
Tail lights ....................................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light illumination
control......................................................121
Talk switch............................................... 353
Telephone switches............................. 507
Theft deterrent system
Alarm ............................................................81
Immobilizer system...............................79
Tire inflation pressure......................... 790
Maintenance data..............................790
Tire inflation pressure display
function....................................................97
Warning light.........................................715
Warning message.............................740
Tire information .....................................795
Glossary.................................................802
Size ...........................................................798
Tire identification number ............. 797
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................800
Tire pressure warning system......... 653
Function..................................................653
Initializing ...............................................653
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters................653
Registering ID codes.......................655
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ...................................................654
Warning light.........................................715
Warning message...................740, 741

856

Alphabetical index

Tires..............................................................651
Chains........................................................321
Checking.................................................651
If you have a flat tire ..........................749
Inflation pressure............................... 790
Information ............................................795
Replacing ...............................................749
Rotating tires ........................................652
Size........................................................... 790
Snow tires ..............................................323
Spare tire................................................749
Tire inflation pressure display
function................................................... 97
Tire pressure warning system .... 653
Warning light ........................................ 715
Warning message.............................740
Tools........................................................... 750
Top tether strap........................................ 66
Total load capacity................................ 186
Towing
Dinghy towing ......................................188
Emergency towing............................704
Towing eyelet...................................... 705
Trailer towing ........................................ 187
TRAC (Traction Control) .................289
Traction battery (hybrid battery) .......74
Traction motor (electric motor) ........ 70
Transmission.............................................199
Driving mode select switch ......... 286
Hybrid transmission........................... 199
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ...................................764
S mode ....................................................202
Paddle shift switches ......................... 201

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

Trip information ....................................... 95
Trip meters................................................. 89
Trunk .............................................................141
Internal trunk release lever .............144
Jam protection function....................143
Luggage security system.................142
Open trunk warning message.... 729
Power trunk opener
and closer ..............................................141
Smart access system
with push-button start.................... 122
Trunk closer switch.............................142
Trunk easy closer ................................143
Trunk features....................................... 581
Trunk grip................................................142
Trunk light................................................143
Trunk opener main switch ..............142
Trunk opener switch............................141
Wireless remote control..................134
Trunk light
Trunk light................................................143
Wattage ...................................................791
Turn signal lights................................... 205
Replacing light bulbs ............691, 695
Turn signal lever.................................205
Wattage ...................................................791

Alphabetical index

U
USB port ....................................... 477, 487
Utility hook ..............................................599
V
Vanity lights
Vanity lights ......................................... 583
Wattage....................................................791
Vanity mirrors........................................... 583
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
Integrated Management)..............290
Vehicle data recordings .........................10
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated
Management (VDIM).....................290
Vehicle identification number......... 783
Vehicle proximity notification
system ......................................................... 71
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC).....................................................289
Ventilators (seat ventilators)............. 591
Voice command system....................353
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) ............289

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

857

W
Warning buzzers
Approach warning ........................... 242
Brake system ...........................................711
Downshifting........................................203
Intuitive parking assist........................261
Key reminder....................................... 744
No-handed driving warning........256
Open door ........................................... 728
Open moon roof ............................... 729
Open hood........................................... 728
Open trunk........................................... 729
Open window..................................... 729
Pre-collision braking........................296
Seat belt reminder............................... 714
Warning lights .......................................... 85
ABS ............................................................ 712
AFS OFF indicator ............................. 713
Brake hold operated
indicator................................................ 713
Brake system .................................711, 714
Charging system ................................. 712
Electric power steering .................... 712
Low fuel level......................................... 714
Malfunction indicator lamp............. 712
Master warning light .......................... 714
Open door ............................................. 714
Parking brake indicator.................... 713
Pre-collision system ........................... 713
Seat belt reminder light .................... 714
Slip indicator ..........................................713
SRS.............................................................. 712
Tire pressure..........................................715
Warning messages................................ 721

858

Alphabetical index

Warning reflector storage belt.......582
Washer .......................................................219
Checking............................................... 646
Low washer fluid
warning message ...........................739
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319
Switch........................................................ 219
Washing and waxing.............................616
Weight
Cargo capacity....................................186
Load limits...............................................186
Weight.....................................................782
Welcome light illumination
control....................................................... 121
Wheels
Replacing wheels.............................. 664
Size........................................................... 790
Window glasses......................................164
Window lock switch ..............................164
Windows....................................................164
Power windows................................... 164
Rear window defogger.................. 384
Windshield wiper de-icer .................385
Windshield wipers .................................219
Position....................................................322
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers.................................................... 219
Winter driving tips..................................319
Wireless remote control key.............134
Battery-Saving Function...................127
Locking/Unlocking............................ 134
Replacing the battery...................... 668
WMA disc ...............................................435

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

X
XM Satellite Radio.............................419
®

Alphabetical index

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

859

860
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever

Trunk opener

Fuel filler door

P. 634

P. 141

P. 229

Hood lock release lever

Tire inflation pressure

P. 634

P. 790

Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)

17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type

Premium unleaded gasoline only

Cold tire inflation
pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
Engine oil type

GS450h_U (OM30D01U)

P. 227, 784
P. 790

With filter
Without filter

qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
6.7 (6.3, 5.5)
6.2 (5.9, 5.2)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
P. 785

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2015:07:27 10:14:31-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2015:07:31 11:31:53-04:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2015:07:31 11:31:53-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:88f0f0f8-3e00-43fa-88a5-1b3b37a572c8
Instance ID                     : uuid:f7df75b7-c4bf-42b4-98ca-5c4699447f71
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 860

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexus OM30D01U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation